Chrysler Automobile 2006 Crossfire User Manual

TABLE OF CONTENTS  
SECTION  
PAGE  
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203  
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255  
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265  
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281  
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INTRODUCTION  
1
CONTENTS  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
INTRODUCTION  
INTRODUCTION  
WARNING!  
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of  
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with  
the operation and maintenance of your Crossfire. It is  
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and  
various customer-oriented documents. You are urged to  
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-  
tions and recommendations in this manual will help  
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.  
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain  
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals  
known to the State of California to cause cancer and  
birth defects or other reproductive harm.  
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL  
Consult the table of contents to determine which section  
contains the information you desire.  
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored  
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with  
the vehicle when sold.  
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a  
complete listing of all subjects.  
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized  
dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained  
technicians and genuine Moparparts, and is interested  
in your satisfaction.  
Consult the following table for a description of the  
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout  
this owners manual:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
INTRODUCTION  
5
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
INTRODUCTION  
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS  
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating  
procedures which could result in an accident or bodily  
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures  
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do  
not read this entire manual you may miss important  
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.  
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER  
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is located be-  
neath the left front corner of the instrument panel, visible  
through the windshield. This number also appears on the  
Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a  
window on your vehicle. Save this label as a convenient  
record of your vehicle identification number and optional  
equipment.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
2
CONTENTS  
A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Obtaining Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10  
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10  
Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10  
Glove Compartment Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11  
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11  
Central Locking Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12  
Automatic Central Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
Start Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15  
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16  
To Use The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16  
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16  
Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17  
Security Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18  
Tow-Away Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18  
Emergency Unlocking Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40  
Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . .47  
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47  
Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47  
Top Switch (Roadster Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
Rear Liftgate/ Decklid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
Lap/ Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23  
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48  
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
9
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS  
You can insert the double-sided keys into the locks with  
either side up.  
Keys  
Included with your vehicle are two remote controls with  
folding keys. The remote control operates all locks on the  
vehicle, including the locking fuel filler door.  
2
The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key  
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can  
be used to order duplicate keys only from an authorized  
dealer. Ask your dealer for these numbers and keep them  
in a safe place.  
To release the key from the folded position, press the  
button. The key unfolds from the fob.  
The transmitter for the remote control is located in the  
key fob.  
CAUTION!  
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always  
remove the key from the ignition and lock all the  
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.  
NOTE: To avoid discharging the battery, the key must  
be removed from the ignition when the vehicle is parked.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
Obtaining Replacement Keys  
Your vehicle is equipped with a theft deterrent locking  
system requiring a special key manufacturing process.  
For security reasons, replacement keys can only be ob-  
tained from your authorized dealer.  
Important!  
Removing the key from the steering lock activates the  
start lock-out. The engine cannot be started.  
Turning the key in the steering lock to the ON/ RUN  
position deactivates the start lock-out.  
NOTE: For vehicles with automatic transmissions, if  
you try to remove the key before you place the shift lever  
in PARK, the key may become trapped temporarily in the  
key cylinder. If this occurs, turn the key clockwise  
slightly, then remove the key as described.  
NOTE: In case the engine cannot be started, and START  
and ERROR are shown in the odometer display field, the  
system is not operational. Contact an authorized dealer.  
Ignition Key Removal  
Turn the key to the LOCK position and remove the key.  
Key-In-Ignition Reminder  
Opening the drivers door when the key is in the ignition  
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11  
GLOVE COMPARTMENT LOCK  
DOOR LOCKS  
The vehicle doors can be locked when the doors are  
closed by either manually pressing the button down at  
the top of the door panel, pressing and releasing the  
bottom portion of the central locking switch located in  
the console, or by pressing and releasing the Lock  
transmit button on the key fob. Also, by turning the key  
clockwise in the drivers door, both doors, liftgate/  
decklid, fuel filler door, and center console (roadster  
only) will lock.  
2
The glove compartment can be locked by turning the key  
straight up to the vertical or right position, and then  
removing the key.  
To unlock the glove compartment, turn the key to the  
horizontal or left position, and then remove the key.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
The doors can be unlocked by pulling on the inside door  
handle, pressing and releasing the top portion of the  
central locking switch located in the console, or by  
pressing and releasing the Unlock transmit button on the  
key fob. Both doors can also be unlocked by turning the  
key counterclockwise in the drivers door.  
NOTE: In case of a malfunction in the central locking  
system, the doors can be locked and unlocked individu-  
ally. To lock, turn the key in the drivers door lock  
clockwise, or push down the lock buttons. To unlock,  
turn the key in the drivers door lock counterclockwise,  
or pull the inside door handles.  
NOTE: If the key in the ignition switch is in the  
ON/ RUN position, the vehicle cannot be locked or  
unlocked with the remote control.  
WARNING!  
For personal security and safety in the event of an  
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive and  
when you park and leave the vehicle.  
When you lock the vehicle, both door lock buttons  
should move down. If either one stays up, the respective  
door is not properly closed. You should then unlock the  
vehicle, open and reclose the door, and lock the vehicle  
again.  
Central Locking Switch  
The central locking switch is located in the console. The  
doors and rear liftgate/ decklid can only be locked with  
the central locking switch if both doors are closed.  
Each individual door can be locked with the respective  
door lock button - the drivers door can only be locked  
when it is closed. If the vehicle has previously been  
locked from the outside, only the door being opened  
from the inside will unlock, and the alarm will come on.  
The other door, the rear liftgate/ decklid, fuel filler door,  
and center console (roadster only) will remain locked.  
If the vehicle was previously locked with the remote  
control or key, the doors and rear liftgate/ decklid cannot  
be unlocked with the central locking switch. If the vehicle  
was previously locked with the central locking switch,  
the complete vehicle is unlocked when a door is opened  
from the inside.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13  
NOTE: The fuel filler door and center console (roadster  
only) cannot be locked or unlocked with the central  
locking switch.  
NOTE: If you attempt to lock the doors with the key in  
the ignition and the drivers door open, the doors will not  
lock.  
2
Automatic Central Locking  
General Notes On the Central Locking System  
If the key in the ignition switch is in the ON/ RUN  
position, the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked with  
the remote control.  
The central locking switch also operates the automatic  
central locking feature. With the automatic central lock-  
ing feature activated, the doors and rear liftgate/ decklid  
are locked at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15  
km/ h) or more; however, the fuel filler door remains  
unlocked.  
If the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked at any time  
with the remote control, it may be necessary to change  
the batteries in the remote.  
To activate this feature, turn the key to the ON/ RUN  
position and hold the upper portion of the switch for a  
minimum of five seconds. To deactivate, turn the key to  
the ON/ RUN position and hold the lower portion of the  
switch for a minimum of five seconds.  
NOTE: To help prevent the vehicle battery from dis-  
charging during short periods of inactivity, perform the  
following:  
1. Make sure that the rear liftgate/ decklid, hood and  
doors are completely closed.  
NOTE: If the doors are unlocked with the central  
locking switch after activating the automatic central  
locking feature and neither door is opened, the doors  
remain unlocked even at vehicle speeds of approximately  
9 mph (15 km/ h) or more.  
2. Make sure that remote transmitter is operating and  
that the battery is good.  
3. Make sure that the hood, rear liftgate/ decklid and  
door switches are in adjustment.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
Perform the quick system check which follows: Use  
the remote transmitter to set the alarm. If the parking  
lamps flash three times, the system is operating prop-  
erly. If not, there is a problem with a switch or the  
system. See your authorized dealer for service.  
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY  
This feature allows you to lock or unlock the vehicle from  
remote locations using a hand-held transmitter located in  
the key fob. You dont have to point the transmitter at the  
vehicle to activate the system. The vehicle doors, rear  
liftgate/ decklid, fuel filler door, and center console (road-  
ster only) can be locked and unlocked using the remote  
control.  
Emergency Unlocking Feature  
In the case of an accident, the doors unlock automatically  
a short time after a strong deceleration is detected, such  
as in a collision (this is intended to aid rescue and exit).  
However, the key must still be in the ignition.  
To Unlock the Doors:  
Press and release the unlock button on the key fob.  
Start Lockout  
NOTE: If within 40 seconds of unlocking with the key  
fob, neither door is opened, the key is not inserted in the  
ignition switch, or the central locking switch is not  
activated, the vehicle will automatically lock.  
Removing the key from the ignition switch activates the  
start lockout. The engine cannot be started. Turning the  
key to the ON/ RUN position deactivates the start lock-  
out. If the engine cannot be started, and the messages  
START and ERROR are shown in the odometer display  
field, the system is not operational. Contact an autho-  
rized dealer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15  
Press the Unlock transmit button on the key fob once to  
unlock drivers door, rear liftgate/ decklid, fuel filler  
door, and center console (roadster only). Press the Unlock  
transmit button twice to unlock both doors, rear liftgate/  
decklid, fuel filler door, and center console (roadster  
only).  
The entire vehicle, including the fuel filler door, may be  
locked or unlocked by using the key in the drivers door.  
The doors and liftgate/ decklid can be locked or unlocked  
by pressing the central locking switch located in the  
center console.  
2
If the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked by pressing  
the transmit button, then it may be necessary to change  
the batteries in the remote control.  
To Lock The Doors:  
Press the Lock button on the key fob once. All turn signal  
lights blink three times to indicate that the vehicle is  
locked. If the turn signal lights do not blink, a door or  
rear liftgate/ decklid is not closed properly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
Panic Alarm  
General Information  
The panic alarm unlocks the drivers door, turns on the  
interior lights, flashes the foglights and sounds the horn  
for about three minutes or until the alarm is turned off.  
The vehicle can be driven while in the Panic mode.  
This transmitter complies with FCC rules part 15. Opera-  
tion is subject to the following conditions:  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference that may be  
received, including interference that may cause undes-  
ired operation.  
To Use the Panic Alarm:  
Press and hold the Panic button to activate the alarm.  
Press and hold the Panic button or unlock the door with  
the key to deactivate the alarm. The alarm will also shut  
off after three minutes or when vehicle speed reaches 15  
mph (24 km/ h).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17  
Transmitter Battery Service  
The recommended replacement Lithium battery is Pana-  
sonicCR 2025 or equivalent.  
2
To change the batteries:  
Insert the new batteries in the direction of the arrow  
with the positive symbol facing upwards.  
Replace the battery cover and press on it until you feel  
it engage.  
Press release button (2) on the key fob. The key folds  
out.  
NOTE: Only replace the batteries in pairs.  
The system may have to be resynchronized if the trans-  
mitter is without voltage for several minutes. To synchro-  
nize, aim the transmitter eye at the vehicle and briefly  
press either the Lock or the Unlock button twice. Within  
Press the battery cover (1) in the direction of the arrow.  
Remove the old batteries.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
approximately 30 seconds, insert the key in the ignition  
and turn it to the ON/ RUN position. The remote control  
should once again be operational.  
Tow-Away Alarm  
The tow-away alarm switch is located on the console. To  
deactivate for towing or jacking up the vehicle, press and  
release the upper portion of the switch. Press and release  
the upper portion to activate it again.  
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM  
The system monitors the doors, rear liftgate/ decklid,  
hood, and ignition for unauthorized operation. The se-  
curity alarm system is automatically armed or disarmed  
with the remote control or any of your vehicles keys by  
locking or unlocking the vehicle.  
After the alarm system has been armed, the exterior  
vehicle lights will flash and an alarm will sound when  
someone attempts to raise the vehicle. The alarm will  
flash the exterior lamps for approximately three minutes  
and sound an audible alarm for 30 seconds. The alarm  
will stay on even if the vehicle is immediately lowered.  
The antitheft alarm is armed within approximately 10  
seconds after locking the vehicle. A blinking light in the  
tow away alarm switch indicates that the alarm is armed.  
Once the alarm system has been armed, the exterior  
vehicle lights will flash and an alarm will sound when a  
door, the rear liftgate/ decklid, the hood, or glove com-  
partment is opened, or if someone attempts to raise the  
vehicle for towing. The alarm will flash the exterior  
lamps for approximately three minutes and sound an  
audible alarm for 30 seconds. The alarm will stay on even  
if the activating element is immediately closed.  
To cancel the alarm, insert the key into the ignition switch  
or press a transmit button on the key fob.  
To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm feature when  
parking on a surface subject to movement (such as a  
ferry), switch off the tow-away alarm. To do so, turn the  
key in the ignition switch to the OFF/ LOCK or ACC  
position, or remove the key from the ignition switch.  
Press the tow-away alarm switch and the indicator light  
will illuminate briefly. Exit the vehicle, and lock the  
vehicle with the key or the remote control.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19  
The tow-away alarm remains switched off until the  
vehicle is locked again with the key or the remote control,  
at which time it is automatically reactivated.  
DECKLID INTERNAL EMERGENCY RELEASE -  
ROADSTER  
As a security measure, a Decklid Internal Emergency  
Release lever is built into the decklid latching mecha-  
nism. In the event of an individual being locked inside  
the trunk, the decklid can be easily opened by pulling on  
the glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the decklid  
latching mechanism. See picture.  
2
WARNING!  
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk by  
climbing into the trunk from outside. Always close  
the decklid when your vehicle is unattended. Once  
in the trunk, young children may not be able to  
escape. If trapped in the trunk, children can die from  
suffocation or heat stroke.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
WARNING!  
If the battery voltage drops below the minimum  
threshold at any time, the Trunk Internal Emergency  
Release will not function.  
WARNING!  
The Trunk Internal Emergency Release will not  
function during the convertible top operation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21  
POWER WINDOWS  
The power window switches are located in the console.  
To operate, turn the key in the ignition switch to the ACC  
or ON/ RUN position. Press the switch in to the resis-  
tance point to open; release the switch when the window  
is in the desired position.  
2
For express opening of windows, press the switch past  
the resistance point and release; the window lowers to  
the fully open position. To interrupt the procedure,  
briefly press the switch again and release.  
When closing the windows, be sure that there is no  
danger of anyone being harmed by the closing proce-  
dure.  
WARNING!  
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key  
from the ignition switch, and lock the vehicle. Do  
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with  
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of  
vehicle equipment can cause serious personal injury.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
Power Window Operation With The Convertible  
Top Switch (Roadster Only)  
WARNING!  
The power windows can also be operated by using the  
convertible top switch.  
Do not allow children to have access to the rear cargo  
area by climbing into the rear cargo area from  
outside. Always close the liftgate/decklid when your  
vehicle is unattended. Once in the cargo area, young  
children may have difficulty leaving the vehicle. If  
trapped in the cargo area, children can die from  
suffocation or heat stroke.  
To operate, turn the key in the ignition switch to the  
ON/ RUN position. Press down on the rear of the con-  
vertible top switch twice to open the windows.  
Press down on the front of the convertible top switch  
twice to close the windows.  
REAR LIFTGATE/DECKLID RELEASE  
You can open the rear liftgate/ decklid by using the  
handle located on the liftgate/ decklid just above the rear  
license plate pocket.  
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS  
Some of the most important safety features in your  
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the lap/  
shoulder seat belts for the driver and passenger, emer-  
gency tensioning retractors for the seat belts, and front  
and side airbags for the driver and passenger. If you will  
be carrying children too small for adult-size belts, the  
passenger side seat belt also can be used to hold infant  
and child restraint systems.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23  
Please pay close attention to the information in this  
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system  
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as  
possible.  
and they reduce the risk of injury caused by striking the  
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle needs  
to be buckled up all the time.  
2
Lap/Shoulder Belts  
Each seating position is equipped with a combined  
lap/ shoulder belt system.  
WARNING!  
The belt webbing retractor will lock only during very  
sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the shoulder  
part of the belt to move freely with you under normal  
conditions. But, in a collision, the belt will lock and  
reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the vehicle or  
being thrown out. The seat belts are also equipped with  
emergency tensioning retractors. These tensioning retrac-  
tors are located in each belts inertia reel and become  
operationally ready with the key in the ignition switch  
turned to the ACC or ON/ RUN positions. The emer-  
gency tensioning retractors are designed to activate dur-  
ing frontal and rear impacts. They remove slack from the  
belts in such a way that the seat belts fit more snugly  
against the body, restricting its forward movement as  
much as possible.  
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer  
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-  
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or  
other occupants, or you can be thrown out of the  
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your  
vehicle are buckled up properly.  
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even  
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver  
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen  
far away from home or on your street.  
Research has shown that seat belts save lives. They also  
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some  
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown  
from the vehicle. Seat belts provide protection from that,  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
In cases of other frontal impacts, roll overs, certain side  
impacts, rear collisions or other accidents without suffi-  
cient frontal or rear impact forces, the emergency tension-  
ing retractors will not be activated. The driver and  
passenger will then be protected by the fastened seat  
belts and inertia reel in the usual manner.  
WARNING!  
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat  
belts are designed to go around the large bones of  
your body. These are the strongest parts of your  
body and can take the forces of a collision the  
best. Wearing your belt in the wrong place could  
make your injuries in a collision much worse. You  
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even  
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instruc-  
tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep  
your passengers safe, too.  
Two people should never be belted into a single  
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one  
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.  
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for  
more than one person, no matter what their size.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25  
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions  
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.  
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch  
plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt  
go around your lap.  
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and  
adjust the seat.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch  
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”  
5. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate  
away from you and pull on the lap belt. Remember that  
a snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a  
collision.  
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your  
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up  
a little on the shoulder belt, as shown.  
6. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is  
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor  
will withdraw any slack in the belt.  
7. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.  
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.  
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to  
allow it to retract fully.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27  
WARNING!  
WARNING!  
A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will  
not protect you properly. The lap portion could  
ride too high on your body, possibly causing  
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the  
buckle nearest you.  
A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.  
In a sudden stop you could move too far forward,  
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat  
belt snugly.  
A belt that is worn under your arm is very  
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside  
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing  
head and neck injury. A belt worn under the arm  
can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as  
shoulder bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder  
so that your strongest bones will take the force in  
a collision.  
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of  
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t  
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across  
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as  
possible and keep it snug.  
2
A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a  
collision it could even cut into you. Be sure the  
belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in  
your vehicle, take it to an authorized dealer and  
have it fixed.  
WARNING!  
Seat belt systems must always be replaced after an  
impact severe enough to fire the emergency locking  
retractors. If there is any question about the condi-  
tion of your seat belt system, take the vehicle to an  
authorized dealer for an inspection.  
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not pro-  
tect you from injury during a collision. You are  
more likely to hit your head in a collision if you  
do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and  
shoulder belt are meant to be used together.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
Seat Belt Extender  
WARNING!  
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended, an  
authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt  
extender. This extender should be used only if the  
existing belt is not long enough. When it is not required,  
remove the extender and store it.  
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision  
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt  
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose  
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.  
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt  
assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they  
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,  
etc.)  
WARNING!  
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can  
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use the  
extender when the lap belt is not long enough when  
it is worn low and snug, and in the recommended  
seating positions. Remove and store the extender  
when not needed.  
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women  
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts  
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is  
the best way to keep the baby safe.  
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt  
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.  
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the  
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take  
the force if there is a collision.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29  
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag  
The vehicle is also equipped with side airbags, located in  
the driver and passenger doors. Side airbags also work  
with seat belts to improve occupant protection.  
2
WARNING!  
Do not put anything on or around the front airbag  
covers or attempt to manually open them. You  
may damage the airbags and you could be injured  
because the airbags are not there to protect you.  
These protective covers are designed to open only  
when the airbags are inflated.  
Do not place objects between you and the side  
airbags; the performance could be adversely af-  
fected and/or objects could be pushed into you,  
causing serious injury.  
This vehicle has airbags for the driver and passenger as a  
supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The drivers  
airbag is mounted in the steering wheel. The passenger  
frontal airbag is mounted in the instrument panel, under  
a cover marked SRS/ AIRBAG.  
Do not attach cup holders or any other objects on  
or around the door. The inflating side airbag  
could drive objects into occupants, causing seri-  
ous injury.  
These airbags inflate in higher speed frontal impacts.  
They work with the instrument panel knee bolster and  
the seat belts to provide improved protection for the  
driver and passenger.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types  
of collisions. The front airbags deploy only in moderate  
to severe front collisions. In certain types of collisions,  
both the front and side airbags may be triggered. But  
even in collisions where the airbags work, you need the  
seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags  
to protect you properly.  
Older children who do not use child safety seats or  
booster seats should ride properly buckled. Never allow  
children to place the shoulder belt behind them or under  
the arm.  
If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the vehicle,  
move the seat as far back as possible, shut off the  
passenger airbag, and use the proper child restraint. See  
the section on “Child Restraint.”  
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize  
the risk of harm from a deploying airbag.  
You should read the instructions provided with your  
child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat to make  
sure that you are using it properly.  
1. Infants in rear-facing child safety seats should NEVER  
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger frontal  
airbag unless the airbag is shut OFF. See “Passenger  
Airbag On/ Off Switch” and “To Shut Off the Passenger  
Airbag.” The rear-facing seat places them too close to the  
passenger air bag in the event of a crash. An airbag  
deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in  
this position.  
2. All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder belts  
properly.  
3. The driver and passenger seats should be moved back  
as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to  
inflate.  
Children that are not big enough to properly wear the  
vehicle seat belt (see section on “Child Restraint”) should  
be secured in child safety seats or booster seats that are  
appropriate for the childs age, height, and weight.  
4. Do not lean against the door, as the side airbags will  
inflate forcefully into the space between you and the  
door. (See the section on “Side Airbags.”)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31  
AIRBAG readiness light  
WARNING!  
Driver and passenger frontal airbag/ inflator units  
Driver and passenger side airbag/ inflator units  
Passenger airbag On/ Off switch and indicator light  
Unique steering wheel and column  
Unique instrument panel  
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more  
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work  
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In  
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.  
Always wear your seat belts even though you  
have airbags.  
2
Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-  
ment panel during airbag deployment could cause  
serious injury.  
Interconnecting wiring  
Knee impact bolster  
Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfort-  
ably extending your arms to reach the steering  
wheel or instrument panel.  
Side impact sensors  
How the Front Airbag System Works  
The side airbags also need room to inflate. Do not  
lean against the door. Sit upright in the center of  
the seat.  
A crash sensor in the occupant compartment deter-  
mines if a frontal impact is severe enough to require  
the airbag. The sensor will not detect side, roll over, or  
rear impacts. The sensor is connected to the diagnostic  
unit and to the airbag/ inflator unit.  
Airbag System Components  
The airbag system consists of the following:  
Airbag control module and internal crash sensor  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
The Occupant Restraint Controller monitors the readi-  
ness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the  
ignition switch is in the START or ON/ RUN positions.  
These include all of the items listed above except the  
knee bolster, the instrument panel, and the steering  
wheel and column.  
WARNING!  
Ignoring the AIRBAG light in your instrument panel  
could mean you won’t have the airbags to protect  
you in a collision. If the light does not come on, stays  
on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you  
drive, have the airbag system checked right away.  
The Occupant Restraint Controller also turns on the  
AIRBAG light in the instrument panel for four seconds  
when the ignition is first turned on, then turns the  
light off. If it detects a malfunction in any part of the  
system, it turns on the light either momentarily or  
continuously depending on the condition that is  
present at the time.  
WARNING!  
Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers  
or attempt to manually open them. You may damage  
the airbags and you could be injured because the  
airbags are not there to protect you. These protective  
covers are designed to open only when the airbags  
are inflated.  
The airbag/ inflator units are in the center of the  
steering wheel and in the instrument panel. The words  
SRS/ AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers.  
When the crash sensor detects an impact requiring the  
airbags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of  
nontoxic nitrogen gas is generated to inflate the air-  
bags. The airbag covers separate and fold out of the  
way as the airbags inflate to their full size. The airbags  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33  
then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the  
driver and passenger. The airbag gas is vented  
through the airbag material towards the instrument  
panel. In this way the airbags do not interfere with  
your control of the vehicle.  
If a Deployment Occurs  
WARNING!  
2
Deployed airbags can’t protect you in another colli-  
sion. Have the airbags replaced by an authorized  
dealer as soon as possible.  
The knee impact bolster helps protect the knees and  
working with the seat belts, position you for the best  
interaction with the airbags.  
The airbag system is designed to deploy when the impact  
sensors detect a moderate-to-severe frontal collision, to  
help restrain the driver and passenger, and then to  
immediately deflate.  
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to  
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This  
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag  
system. The system may also inflate only one airbag in a  
reduced severity frontal collision if the seat belt on that  
side of the vehicles is not fastened. This also does not  
mean something is wrong with your airbag system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any  
or all of the following may occur:  
or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation  
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on  
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturers in-  
structions for cleaning.  
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-  
sions and/ or skin reddening to the driver and passen-  
ger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The abrasions  
are similar to friction rope burns or those you might  
get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They  
are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not  
permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you  
havent healed significantly within a few days, or if  
you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.  
It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the  
airbags have been deployed. If you are involved in  
another collision, the airbags will not be in place to  
protect you.  
How the Side Impact Airbag System Works  
The side impact airbags are located in the doors above  
the armrest.  
As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like  
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the  
process that generates the nontoxic nitrogen gas used  
for airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irri-  
tate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or  
eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose  
Separate crash sensors in the vehicle determine if a  
side impact is severe enough to require the airbag on  
the side of the vehicle subjected to an impact. As with  
the frontal system, the sensors are connected to the  
diagnostic unit and the airbag/ inflator units.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35  
When a side impact above a predetermined threshold  
occurs, the sensors signal the inflator on the impacted  
side of the vehicle. A large quantity of nontoxic  
nitrogen gas is generated to inflate the airbag. The  
door panel opens to allow the airbag to inflate to its  
full size.  
WARNING!  
Do not put anything on or around the airbag  
covers or attempt to manually open them. You  
may damage the airbags and you could be injured  
because the airbags are not there to protect you.  
These protective covers are designed to open only  
when the airbags are inflated.  
2
Do not attach cup holders or any other objects on  
or around the door. The inflating side airbag  
could drive the objects into occupants, causing  
serious injury.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
The operational readiness of the side airbag system is  
verified by the airbag indicator light in the instrument  
cluster when turning the key in the ignition switch to  
the ON/ RUN position. If no fault is detected, the light  
will go out after approximately four seconds. After the  
light goes out, the system continues to monitor the  
components and circuitry of the airbag system and  
will indicate a malfunction by coming on again. If the  
light does not come on at all, or if it fails to go out after  
the four seconds, or if it comes on thereafter, a mal-  
function in the system has been detected. See your  
authorized dealer for service.  
WARNING!  
The door mounted side airbag deploys with con-  
siderable force. Being too close to the door panel  
during airbag deployment could cause serious  
injury or death.  
All occupants must be in the appropriate restraint  
for their size and age, especially children 12 and  
under.  
To help avoid the potential for serious injury and  
death should the side airbag be activated, please  
follow these guidelines:  
1. Occupants, especially children, should never lean  
against the door in the area where the side airbag  
inflates;  
2. Occupants need to sit upright in the center of the  
seat to give the side airbag room to inflate;  
3. Always use the appropriate restraint for the occu-  
pant and ensure it is properly used.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37  
Passenger Front Airbag On/Off Switch  
The on/ off switch is located at the right end of the  
instrument panel and is accessible by opening the pas-  
senger door.  
If the airbag is turned off when there is any other  
occupant at that position, the supplemental restraint  
provided by the airbag will not be available.  
2
The on/ off switch is to be used only when the passenger  
is:  
an infant (less than 1 year old),  
a child, age 1 to 12,  
an adult with a medical condition which makes pas-  
senger airbag inflation (deployment) a greater risk for  
the passenger than the risk of hitting the dashboard  
(instrument panel) or windshield in a crash.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
To turn OFF the passenger front airbag, use the on/ off  
switch located on the instrument panel.  
To Shut Off the Passenger Airbag:  
Place the ignition key in the on/ off switch, turn the  
key clockwise, and remove the key from the switch.  
This will shut off the passenger front airbag.  
NOTE: When the passenger airbag is turned off, the  
yellow airbag off light will illuminate.  
The air bag will remain off until the switch is turned  
back to the ON position.  
The switch does NOT turn off the side airbag.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39  
To Turn On the Passenger Airbag:  
Maintaining Your Airbag System  
Place the ignition key in the on/ off switch, turn the  
key counterclockwise, and remove the key from the  
switch. This will turn on the passenger airbag. The  
Passenger Airbag Off light on the console will turn off,  
or will not be illuminated when the ignition is turned  
to the ON position.  
WARNING!  
2
Modifications to any part of the airbag system  
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could  
be injured because the airbag is not there to  
protect you. Do not modify the components or  
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or  
stickers to the airbag covers. Do not modify the  
front bumper or vehicle body structure.  
WARNING!  
The airbag may malfunction and serious injury  
could result if key is left in the airbag shut off  
switch. Always remove the key.  
You need proper knee impact protection in a  
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket  
equipment on or behind the knee impact bolster.  
You can be injured if you are too close to either  
airbag cover when the airbags inflate. It is dan-  
gerous to try to repair any part of the airbag  
system yourself. Don’t try to repair the airbag  
system. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your  
vehicle that it has airbags.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
Airbag Light  
WARNING!  
You will want to have the airbags ready for  
your protection in case of a collision. While the  
airbag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) is  
designed to be maintenance free, if any of the  
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the  
system immediately.  
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny  
baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The  
force required to hold even an infant on your lap  
could become so great that you could not hold the  
child, no matter how strong you are. The child and  
others could be badly injured. Any child riding in  
your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the  
child’s size.  
The AIRBAG light does not come on or flickers during  
the four seconds when the ignition switch is first  
turned on.  
The light remains on or flickers after the four second  
interval.  
Infants and Child Restraints  
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children  
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an  
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owners  
Manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child.  
Use the restraint that is correct for your child:  
The light flickers or comes on and remains on while  
driving.  
Child Restraint  
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the  
time, babies and children, too. Every state in the United  
States and all Canadian provinces require that small  
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,  
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.  
Safety experts recommend that children ride  
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least  
one year old and weigh at least 9 kg (20 lbs.). Two  
types of child restraints can be used rearward-facing:  
infant carriers and “convertible” child seats.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41  
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the  
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up  
to about 20 lbs. (9 kg). “Convertible” child seats can be  
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the  
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher  
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than  
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing  
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs. (9 kg) but are  
less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are  
held in the vehicle by the lap/ shoulder belt or the  
LATCH child restraint anchorage system. (See the  
LATCH - Child Seat Anchorage System section.)  
WARNING!  
A rearward facing infant restraint must not be  
used unless the passenger airbag has been shut  
off. A rearward facing infant restraint may be  
struck by a deploying passenger airbag which  
may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant.  
2
Improper installation can lead to failure of a child  
restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The  
child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the  
manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing  
a child restraint.  
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in  
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger  
airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag  
deployment could cause severe injury or death to  
infants in this position.  
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child  
restraint:  
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it  
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety  
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure  
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle  
where you will use it before you buy it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
The restraint must be appropriate for your childs  
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for  
weight and height limits.  
than one year. These child seats are also held in the  
vehicle by the lap/ shoulder belt or the LATCH child  
restraint anchorage system. (See LATCH - Child Seat  
Anchorage System section.)  
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the  
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may  
not work when you need it.  
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing  
more than 40 lbs. (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit  
the vehicles seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit  
with knees bent over the vehicles seat cushion while the  
childs back is against the seat back, they should use a  
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-  
positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the  
lap/ shoulder belt.  
Buckle the child into the seat according to the seat  
manufacturers directions.  
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the  
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.  
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or  
collision, it could strike the occupants and cause  
serious personal injury.  
Children Too Large For Booster Seats  
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt  
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend  
over the front of the seat when their back is against the  
seat back, should use the lap/ shoulder belt.  
NOTE:  
For additional information  
refer to  
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK.  
Older Children and Child Restraints  
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs. (9 kg) and who are  
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the  
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child  
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children  
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs. (9 to 18 kg) and who are older  
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.  
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug  
as possible.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43  
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or  
slouching can move the belt out of position.  
are general instructions, and not all child restraint sys-  
tems will be installed exactly as described here. Again,  
carefully follow the installation instructions that were  
provided with the child restraint system.  
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the  
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a  
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind  
their back.  
2
The passenger seat lower anchorages are round bars,  
located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the  
seat back, and are just visible when you lean in to install  
the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run  
your finger along the intersection of the seat back and  
seat cushion surfaces.  
LATCH - Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower  
Anchors and Tether for Children)  
Your vehicles passenger seat is equipped with the child  
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH  
system provides for the installation of the child restraint  
without using the vehicles belts, instead securing the  
child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether  
straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure.  
LATCH-compatible child restraints are now available.  
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint  
System  
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the  
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. These  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
The passenger seat tether anchorage is located on the  
back of the seat cushion frame. It is visible by moving the  
passenger seat forward in the vehicle.  
equipped with a tether strap, a hook for attachment to the  
tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the  
tension of the strap.  
You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and  
on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the  
hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next, you  
can attach the tether strap to the anchor by moving the  
passenger seat forward. Route the child restraint tether  
directly over the top of the seat, through the strap near  
the top of the seat back, and attach the hook to the anchor  
bar. Recline the seat back and move the passenger seat as  
far rearward as possible. Next, attach the lower hooks to  
the passenger seat lower anchor bars by pushing aside  
the seat cover material. Finally, tighten all three straps as  
you push the child restraint rearward and downward  
into the seat, removing slack in the straps according to  
the child restraint manufacturers instructions.  
Many, but not all LATCH-Compatible child restraint  
systems will be equipped with separate straps on each  
side, with each having a hook or connector for attach-  
ment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting  
the tension in the strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints  
and some rear-facing infant restraints will also be  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45  
retractor action is restored. Any seat belt system will  
loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull  
it tight if necessary.  
WARNING!  
Improper installation of a child restraint to the  
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or  
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or  
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly  
when installing an infant or child restraint.  
2
If your child restraint is equipped with a tether strap,  
attach it to the vehicle by first moving the seat back fully  
forward. Next, route the child restraint tether directly  
over the top of the seat, through the strap near the top of  
the seat back, and attach the hook to the anchor bar.  
Recline the seat back and move the passenger seat as far  
rearward as possible. Remove slack in the tether strap as  
you push the child restraint downward and rearward,  
following the child restraint manufacturers instructions.  
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat  
Belt  
Child restraints can be securely fastened in the passenger  
seat using the seat belts. For this purpose, the passenger  
seat belt retractor provides two modes of operation -  
normal emergency locking and automatic locking. For  
child restraint installation, the retractor switches to auto-  
matic locking when the belt is pulled out to the full extent  
of its travel. As the belt retracts, the retractor locks to  
prevent the belt from being pulled out again. Pulling the  
belt snugly over the child restraint toward the retractor  
secures the restraint in place. When the belt retracts fully  
after child restraint removal, normal (emergency locking)  
Child Restraint Tether Anchor - General  
Information  
Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for con-  
nection to tether anchors have been available for some  
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will  
provide add-on tether strap kits for certain of their older  
products. There is a tether strap anchor behind the  
passenger seat.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
To attach the tether strap to the anchor, move the  
seatback fully forward. Pass the child restraint tether  
hook over the top of the seat, through the strap near the  
top of the seat back, and attach it to the anchor bar behind  
the passenger seat, below the seatback. After securing the  
tether hook to the bar, recline the seatback fully rearward  
and move the seat to its most rearward position.  
Install the child restraint and return the seatback to an  
upright position. Remove slack from the tether strap  
according to the child restraint manufacturers directions.  
WARNING!  
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to  
increased head motion and possible injury to the  
child. Use only the anchor position directly behind  
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether  
strap.  
Transporting Pets  
Deploying airbags could harm your pet. An unrestrained  
pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a  
passenger during panic braking or in a collision.  
Pets should be restrained in pet harnesses or pet carriers  
that are secured by seat belts.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47  
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS  
The engine in your new Crossfire does not require a long  
break-in period. Following these few simple guidelines is  
all that is necessary for a good break-in.  
SAFETY TIPS  
Exhaust Gas  
2
WARNING!  
Drive your vehicle at moderate vehicle and engine  
speeds during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km).  
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon  
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.  
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can  
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)  
follow the safety tips below.  
Do not make any full throttle starts and avoid full  
throttle acceleration.  
Use the proper transmission gear for your speed  
range.  
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined  
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in  
or out of the area.  
Avoid excessive idling.  
Check the engine oil level at every fuel fill.  
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the  
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con-  
trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower  
at high speed.  
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during the  
first few thousand miles of operation. This should be  
considered as a normal part of the break-in and not an  
indication of a problem.  
To avoid drawing exhaust gases into the vehicle, close  
the rear liftgate/ decklid while driving. However, if for  
some reason it must remain open, close all windows.  
Adjust the heating or cooling system to force outside  
air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the Vehicle  
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside  
the Vehicle  
Seat Belts  
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,  
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced  
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.  
Tires  
Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear  
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects  
lodged in the tread. Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall  
cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness and tires for  
proper pressure.  
Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if  
they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,  
etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or retractor  
condition, see your authorized dealer.  
Lights  
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights  
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high  
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.  
Airbag Light  
The light should come on and remain on for  
four seconds as a bulb check when the ignition  
switch is first turned ON. If the bulb is not lit  
during starting, have it replaced. If the light  
stays on or comes on while driving, have the system  
checked by an authorized dealer.  
Fluid Leaks  
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,  
water, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are  
present, the cause should be corrected immediately.  
Defrosters  
NOTE: Use of the air conditioning may cause puddles  
Check operation by pressing the A/ C control button,  
selecting the defrost mode and placing the blower control  
on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed  
against the windshield.  
of water to form under the vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
CONTENTS  
3
Convertible Top Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52  
To Lower The Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53  
To Raise The Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67  
Inside Day/ Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67  
Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . .67  
Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67  
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69  
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69  
Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61  
Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63  
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65  
Power Outlet/ Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65  
Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66  
Cupholder (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
50 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
Heated Seats (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73  
To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . .74  
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75  
Front Map/ Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75  
Battery Saver Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75  
Instrument Panel Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76  
Night Security Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76  
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76  
Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .76  
Fog Lights (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77  
Standing Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77  
Multifunction Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78  
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78  
Headlight Dimmer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79  
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80  
Windshield Wipers And Washer . . . . . . . . . . . .80  
Mist Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82  
Tire Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83  
Rear Spoiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87  
Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89  
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . .91  
Synchronizing ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93  
Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94  
To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95  
To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96  
To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96  
Using Speed Control On Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . .97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 51  
Using The Universal Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Reprogramming a Single Button . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Umbrella Hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
52 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
CONVERTIBLE TOP OPERATION  
WARNING!  
Before operating the switch for the convertible top,  
make sure that no persons can be injured by the  
moving parts (convertible top frame and tonneau  
cover).  
WARNING!  
The convertible top does not provide the structural  
protection that a reinforced metal roof does and the  
fabric top cannot be expected to prevent the ejection  
of the occupants of a vehicle in a collision. There-  
fore, it is important that all occupants wear their seat  
belts at all times when riding in a convertible.  
Studies have shown that it is generally safer to  
remain inside a vehicle during a collision than to be  
ejected from the vehicle.  
Hands must never be placed near the sport bar,  
convertible top frame, upper windshield area, shelf  
behind sport bar, or convertible top storage compart-  
ment while the convertible top is being raised or  
lowered. Serious personal injury may occur.  
If potential danger exists, release the convertible top  
switch. This immediately interrupts the raising or  
lowering procedure. You then can operate the con-  
vertible top switch to raise or lower the convertible  
top away from the danger zone.  
For safety reasons, the convertible top should only be  
opened and closed when the vehicle is standing still. Top  
operation is allowed up to a maximum of 9 mph (15  
km/ h). Above this speed, top operation will cease and an  
audible warning will sound. The top operation can be  
resumed after the vehicle is below the maximum speed  
by pressing the convertible top switch again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 53  
To Lower The Top:  
CAUTION!  
WARNING!  
When opening and closing the convertible top, make  
sure that:  
Top operation can be suspended for a maximum of  
10 minutes. Thirty seconds before the end of this  
period an audible warning will begin to sound  
continuously. At the end of this period, hydraulic  
pressure will be released and the top and tonneau  
cover will slowly collapse. In order to re-initialize  
the top cycle, the tonneau cover must first be moved  
and held in its full open position manually. The  
convertible top should then be carefully lowered  
into its storage compartment, and the tonneau  
closed. Hands should be kept away from moving  
parts of the top and top compartment mechanisms to  
avoid injury during this operation and as hydraulic  
pressure is reestablished. The hydraulic pressure can  
be reestablished by turning the ignition to the ON/  
RUN position and pushing down on the convertible  
top switch twice. Refer to Convertible Top Emer-  
gency Operation in the What To Do In Emergencies  
section of this manual.  
There is sufficient clearance of at least 6 ft. (1.8m)  
for the convertible top to move up.  
3
Nothing is placed on the tonneau cover.  
The outside temperature is above 32°F (0°C).  
Otherwise the convertible top and other parts of the  
vehicle could be damaged.  
CAUTION!  
Use caution when putting items into the storage  
compartment with the top in the closed position. The  
tonneau cover extensions are exposed and can be  
damaged if luggage or other items are pushed too far  
into the storage compartment.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
54 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
CAUTION!  
CAUTION!  
To avoid possible damage to the tonneau cover and  
convertible top, do not allow the convertible top to  
remain in the suspended position. After approxi-  
mately 10 minutes in the suspended position, the  
hydraulic pressure will be released which will allow  
the top and the tonneau cover to lower. The convert-  
ible top switch can be pressed to cancel this opera-  
tion.  
To fully insure that no damage occurs, be sure that  
the vehicle is at a complete stop before attempting to  
lower or raise the top.  
NOTE: If the top stops during the raising or lowering  
procedure, start the engine and continue operation.  
1. Make sure the rear cargo compartment divider is  
unfolded and secured in the vertical position.  
If the divider is in its stowed position, first unfold the  
panels towards the rear of the vehicle. Pull up on the  
vertical panel using the center cutout shown, and hook  
the pins at the top into the brackets mounted to the cargo  
compartment trim on each side near the forward edge of  
the decklid opening. The pins must be hooked in these  
brackets in order for the top to operate.  
CAUTION!  
To avoid damage to either the top or the rear win-  
dow, check the tonneau cover area at the rear of the  
vehicle interior to be sure that it is clear of debris or  
other items. Do not use the tonneau cover area for  
other storage purposes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 55  
NOTE: See label attached to underside of decklid.  
CAUTION!  
Be sure to turn the ignition to the “ON/RUN”  
position before releasing the top from the wind-  
shield header. The windows will not go down if the  
top is released from the header without the ignition  
turned “ON”. The side windows can be damaged if  
the doors are opened or closed with the windows up  
and the top released from the windshield header.  
3
3. Turn the ignition key to the ON/ RUN position.  
4. Unlock the top from the windshield header by pulling  
the latch handle down and turning it clockwise just over  
one quarter turn.  
2. Make sure the decklid is closed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
56 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
NOTE: Once the release handle is rotated, the windows  
will automatically go down.  
6. Push down on the rear of the convertible top switch to  
begin top operation. The rear of the top will unlatch and  
the tonneau cover will open before the top begins to fold.  
Hold the switch down until the convertible top is com-  
pletely lowered into its storage compartment and the  
tonneau cover is closed and latched. A single audible  
signal will sound to indicate completion of the top  
opening operation.  
5. Push up on the convertible top latch handle to create a  
gap between the header and top of approximately 8  
inches (200 mm). As soon as the top is free, rotate the  
latch handle counterclockwise just over one quarter turn  
and push it up into the stored position.  
NOTE: Failure to perform any of these steps will prevent  
the top from operating with the convertible top switch and  
will cause an audible information signal to sound.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 57  
NOTE: Once the top is lowered and the audible signal  
is heard, you can continue to push the convertible top  
switch down or push it within 2 seconds to raise the  
windows.  
CAUTION!  
To prevent mildew, the convertible top must be dry  
before lowering it into the storage compartment.  
The windows can also be closed/ opened later using the  
power window switches.  
Do not lower a frozen convertible top until thawed  
and dry. Doing so may result in damage not covered  
by the DaimlerChrysler Limited Warranty.  
3
CAUTION!  
Do not place anything on the tonneau cover.  
The tonneau cover must never be used as a seating  
area.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
58 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
To Raise The Top:  
4. If the windows are raised, they will lower as soon as  
the convertible switch is pressed down. The tonneau  
cover will open, and the top will then close until it  
reaches approximately 8 inches (200 mm) from the  
header. The tonneau cover will then close and the rear of  
the top will close and latch. At the completion of this  
cycle, a single audible signal will sound.  
1. Make sure the rear cargo compartment divider is still  
secured in the vertical position.  
2. Make sure the decklid is closed.  
3. Turn the ignition key to the ON/ RUN position and  
press down on the front of the convertible top switch.  
NOTE: If the top is latched to the windshield header  
before the rear of the top is properly latched, an audible  
warning will sound.  
5. Pull the latch handle down from the storage position  
and turn it clockwise just over one quarter turn.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 59  
6. Pull the latch handle and convertible top down to  
engage the top with the header.  
3
WARNING!  
To prevent possible accidents, drive the vehicle only  
with the convertible top either completely closed  
and locked, or fully lowered into its storage compart-  
ment.  
7. When the top engages to the header, turn the latch  
handle counterclockwise just over one quarter turn to the  
lock position and push the latch handle up to the stored  
position. The top is now secured in the closed position.  
NOTE: The convertible top switch indicator will light  
up and an audible warning will be heard if you start  
driving the vehicle without the top fully locked in the  
closed position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
60 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
8. Once the top has been raised and locked, the cargo  
compartment divider can be unhooked and folded for-  
ward to increase the cargo compartment capacity. Follow  
the steps shown on the label affixed to the decklid trim.  
CAUTION!  
Once the cargo compartment divider is folded for-  
ward to increase the cargo compartment capacity, the  
tonneau cover flaps are exposed and can be damaged  
by long items being put into the cargo compartment.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 61  
Convertible Top Lamp and Audible Signal Chart  
Top unlatched but not  
pushed up from wind-  
shield header  
Below is a table containing all of the visual and audible  
signals that can be seen or heard during top operation or  
if a fault is present.  
Vehicle speed greater than  
9 mph (15 km/ h) while  
trying to initiate top op-  
eration  
Visual and Audible  
Signals  
Operation Mode or Fault  
3
Single audible signal is  
heard  
Roof reaches fully open  
position  
Battery voltage less than  
10.6 Volts  
Roof reaches fully closed  
position  
Convertible top switch  
lamp flashes quickly and pump run-time reached  
a quick audible beep is  
heard  
Maximum hydraulic  
Convertible top switch  
lamp flashes slowly and a  
slow audible beep is  
heard  
Decklid open  
Power window motor(s)  
or rear spoiler inoperative  
Cargo compartment di-  
vider not secured in verti-  
cal position  
Vehicle speed greater than  
9 mph (15 km/ h) during  
top operation  
Top latched at windshield  
header before top cycle  
complete  
Top operation suspended  
longer than 10 minutes  
Convertible top switch  
lamp flashes rapidly  
General top control mod-  
ule fault  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
62 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
CONSOLE FEATURES  
The console has a power outlet/ cigar lighter, an ash tray  
with a coin holder, a cupholder (if equipped), and the  
passenger airbag light. In addition, there are switches to  
control the heated seats (if equipped), rear spoiler, elec-  
tronic stability program (ESP), hazard flashers, central  
locking, rear defroster and towing alarm.  
Operating controls for the heating and air conditioning  
systems, power windows, power mirrors, convertible top  
switch (if equipped), and the automatic transmission  
program mode selector switch (if equipped) are also  
located in the console.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 63  
Storage Compartments  
On some models, a cargo net for storage is located in the  
footwell area on the passenger side.  
There is a storage compartment in the console. To open  
the storage compartment, lift the lid with the finger  
depressions on either side. To close, lower the lid until  
the lock engages.  
3
Additionally, storage pockets are located on the wall  
behind each seat and on each door panel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
64 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
A storage pouch is located on the rear wall between the  
seats, and the drivers sunvisor has a document strap.  
WARNING!  
Remove the ashtray only with the vehicle stopped  
and the ignition off. Otherwise, the vehicle might  
move unexpectedly as a result of unintended contact  
with the gear selector lever.  
WARNING!  
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help to  
prevent stored objects from being thrown about and  
injuring vehicle occupants during an accident.  
Ashtray  
Lightly touch the bottom of the ashtray cover. The  
ashtray will open automatically.  
To remove the ashtray insert, pull the ashtray past the  
detent. Hold both sides of the insert, and pull up. To  
install the ashtray, place it in the frame and push down to  
engage.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 65  
Coin Holder  
up to a maximum of 15 amps. The outlet is protected by  
a 15 amp fuse, located behind the fuse cover on the left  
end of the instrument panel.  
With the ashtray open, folding down the cover plate  
reveals the coin holder, which can accommodate nine  
coins in various sizes up to a U.S. quarter. The coin slots  
are shaped to retain the coins, and the cover plate ensures  
that the coins remain in the coin holder.  
3
The lighter will operate only when the ignition switch is  
in the ON/ ACC position. It heats up when pushed in and  
pops out automatically when ready for use. To preserve  
the heating element, do not hold the lighter in the heating  
position.  
Power Outlet/Cigar Lighter  
The dual-purpose power outlet is located in the console,  
next to the passenger airbag off warning light. The power  
outlet can accommodate a lighter or electrical accessories  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
66 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
Glove Compartment  
To lock the glove compartment, turn the key to the right  
and remove. To unlock, turn the key to the left and  
remove.  
Pull on the handle to open the glove compartment.  
CUPHOLDER (If Equipped)  
The cupholder is located in the console. To open the  
cupholder, gently press downward on the front edge of  
the top panel, and then release. The cupholder will open  
automatically.  
When the cupholder is no longer needed, push forward  
on the top edge of the door and rotate it down into the  
console until it engages.  
CAUTION!  
Only use containers that fit into the cupholder.  
Overfilled containers could spill during vehicle ma-  
neuvers.  
The cupholder is designed to hold beverage containers  
up to 20 oz. (1 L).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 67  
MIRRORS  
Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature  
All exterior mirrors are hinged to move forward or  
rearward to resist damage. The hinges have three detent  
positions: full forward, full rearward, and normal.  
Inside Day/Night Mirror  
Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear  
window. A two point pivot system allows for horizontal  
and vertical mirror adjustment.  
Heated Remote Control Mirrors (If Equipped)  
Both outside mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice when  
the Rear Window Defroster switch is depressed.  
3
Outside Mirrors  
Adjust the outside mirrors to center on the adjacent lane  
of traffic, with a slight overlap of the view seen in the  
inside mirror.  
WARNING!  
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side  
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away  
than they actually are. Relying too much on your  
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide  
with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside  
mirror to judge the size or distance of objects seen in  
the convex mirror.  
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the  
small control under the mirror to the night position  
(toward rear of vehicle) The mirror should be adjusted  
with the glare control set in the day position (toward  
windshield).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
68 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
Power Remote Control Outside Mirrors  
The mirrors can be adjusted by using the remote control  
located in the console. Rotate the switch to the right to  
select the right mirror, rotate to the left to select the left  
mirror. Then use the switch to adjust the selected mirror  
to the desired direction.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 69  
Vanity Mirrors  
SEATS  
Your vehicles seats can be adjusted either manually or  
electrically, depending on how your vehicle is equipped.  
WARNING!  
3
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is  
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat  
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt  
might not be properly adjusted and you could be  
injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is  
parked.  
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the  
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your  
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat  
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use  
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.  
A vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use the mirror,  
rotate the sun visor down and slide open the mirror  
cover.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
70 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
NOTE: When moving the seat, be sure that there are no  
items in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise you  
could damage the seats.  
Manual Seat Adjustments (If Equipped)  
Seat Height (Drivers Seat Only)  
Pull up on handle 3.  
To lower the seat, use your body weight to push the  
seat downward.  
To raise the seat, lift your body weight off the seat to  
obtain a higher seat position.  
Release handle 3 when you are at your desired seat  
level.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 71  
Forward/Rearward  
Head Restraint Height  
Pull up on handle 4.  
WARNING!  
Move the seat forward or backward to your desired  
position which allows you to reach the pedals com-  
fortably.  
For your protection, drive only with properly posi-  
tioned head restraints.  
3
Adjust head restraint to support the back of the head  
approximately at ear level.  
Let go of handle 4. The seat should make an audible  
click when positioned properly.  
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head  
restraints. Head restraints are intended to help re-  
duce injuries during and accident.  
Check for proper engagement before driving.  
Backrest Tilt  
Turn handwheel 2 forward or backward to adjust the  
backrest tilt to your desired position which allows  
your arms to slightly bend when holding the steering  
wheel.  
Adjust the height of the head restraints by pulling  
them upwards manually.  
For a lower position, press release button 1 and push  
down on the head restraints manually.  
Adjust to a comfortable seating position that still allows  
you to reach the accelerator and brake pedal safely. The  
position should be as far to the rear as possible, consistent  
with ability to properly operate controls.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
72 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
Driver Eight-Way Power Seat (If Equipped)  
The switches to adjust the power seats are located on the  
outboard side of each seat. The drivers seat features  
eight-way power adjustment - horizontal, vertical, cush-  
ion tilt and back angle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 73  
Passenger Four-Way Power Seat (If Equipped)  
The switches to adjust the passenger seat are also on the  
outboard side of the seat. The passenger seat provides  
four-way adjustment - horizontal and back angle.  
3
After turning the ignition switch ON, you can choose the  
HI, LO, or OFF setting. Indicators on the switches show  
which setting has been selected.  
The heated seats setting will automatically switch from  
HI to LO after approximately 5 minutes.  
Heated Seats (If Equipped)  
This feature heats the driver and passenger seats. The  
controls for the heated seats are located on the instrument  
panel, below the radio.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD  
To open the hood, pull the release lever located inside  
your vehicle, below the instrument panel.  
WARNING!  
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when  
the vehicle is moving, and block your forward vi-  
sion. You could have a collision. Be sure all hood  
latches are fully latched before driving.  
Then, reach under the hood and pull upward on the  
safety latch and lift the hood.  
To prevent possible damage, close the hood by dropping  
it from approximately 12 inches (30 cm).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75  
INTERIOR LIGHTS  
Front Map/Reading Lights  
A two-position mode selector switch controls the interior  
These lights are located between the sun visors. A single  
lights located in the overhead console.  
centrally located switch operates both lights.  
3
The AUTO mode turns the lights on when a door is open  
or ajar, or when locking or unlocking the vehicle. AUTO  
mode also has a “fade to off” feature. When the doors are  
closed or locked, they gradually “fade” off.  
Battery Saver Feature  
To prevent battery drain if a door is left open or ajar, the  
interior lights will turn off automatically after 15 minutes.  
After the door is closed, the interior lights will return to  
their normal function.  
The OFF position turns off the interior lights feature.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
Instrument Panel Lighting  
EXTERIOR LIGHTS  
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotate the  
dimmer control to the left of the speedometer to increase  
or decrease brightness of the instrument panel.  
Headlights and Parking Lights  
When the headlight switch is turned clockwise from OFF  
to the first position, the parking lights, taillights, side  
marker lights, license plate lights and instrument panel  
lights are all illuminated.  
Night Security Illumination  
For added security when exiting the vehicle after driving  
with the exterior lights on, the lights will switch on again  
for approximately 30 seconds after closing the last door.  
The lights-on timing can be changed at your authorized  
dealer.  
The headlights turn on when the switch is turned to the  
second position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77  
Lights-On Reminder  
Fog Lights (If Equipped)  
If the headlights or parking lights are left on after the  
ignition is turned off, a warning will sound if the drivers  
door is opened.  
To operate the fog lights, pull the headlight  
switch out one stop, with the parking lights  
and/ or low beam headlights on. A light to the  
lower left of the headlight switch will illumi-  
nate when the fog lights are on.  
Daytime Running Lights (Where Applicable)  
VEHICLES WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION  
3
To turn off the fog lights, push the headlight switch in  
fully. Selecting high beam headlights will also turn off the  
fog lights.  
The low beam headlights, parking lights, side marker  
lights, taillights and license plate lights are automatically  
switched on whenever the vehicle is started and the  
transmission gear selector is in a driving position.  
Standing Lights  
When the vehicle is parked on the street, the standing  
lights (left or right side parking lights) can be turned on,  
making your vehicle more visible to passing vehicles.  
VEHICLES WITH MANUAL TRANSMISSION  
The low beam headlights, parking lights, side marker  
lights, taillights, and license plate lights are automatically  
switched on whenever the vehicle is started and the  
parking brake is released.  
To operate the standing lights, turn the headlight switch  
counterclockwise one stop (right lamps) or two stops (left  
lamps) from the OFF position. To turn off the standing  
lights, return the headlight switch to the OFF position.  
For nighttime driving, the exterior lights switch should  
be in the low beam position to permit activation of the  
high beam headlights.  
The standing lights cannot be operated when the ignition  
switch is in the ON/ RUN position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
MULTIFUNCTION CONTROL LEVER  
CAUTION!  
Standing lamps are intended for short term use  
when parking. If these lights are left on for a long  
period of time, your car’s battery may drain, causing  
a possible starting problem. Assure that the head-  
lamp switch is in the OFF position when leaving the  
vehicle.  
Turn Signals  
Move the multifunction control lever up to activate the  
right turn signal; move the lever down to activate the left  
turn signal. An arrow on the inside of the speedometer  
will flash to indicate operation.  
To signal minor directional changes, such as changing  
lanes, move the control lever just to the point of resis-  
tance, and hold it there.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79  
To operate the turn signals continuously, move the con-  
trol lever up or down past the point of resistance. The  
operation is automatically canceled when the steering  
wheel is turned to a large enough degree.  
Headlight Dimmer Switch  
Push the multifunction control lever toward the instru-  
ment panel to turn the headlights to high beam. Pull the  
lever toward you to switch to low beam.  
If one of the turn signal lights fail, the turn signal  
indicator system flashes and sounds at a faster than  
normal rate. If an indicator fails to light when the control  
lever is moved, it may mean that the fuse or indicator  
bulb is defective.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
Passing Light  
Windshield Wipers And Washer  
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by  
lightly pulling the multifunction control lever toward the  
steering wheel. This will cause the headlights to turn on  
at high beam and remain on until the control lever is  
released.  
The wipers and washer are operated by a switch in the  
multifunction control lever. Turn the end of the lever to  
select desired wiper speed: off, intermittent, normal, or  
fast.  
NOTE: Wiper speed is altered when the vehicle is  
stopped with the wipers on. If the speed setting is  
intermittent, the wipers will stop wiping when the ve-  
hicle comes to a complete stop. If the wiper speed setting  
is normal, the wipers will change to intermittent wiping  
when the vehicle comes to a complete stop.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81  
Push the end of the lever inward and hold it to activate  
the wiper and washer together.  
3
WARNING!  
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield  
could lead to an accident. You might not see other  
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of  
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the  
windshield with the defroster before and during  
windshield washer use.  
Mist Function  
Push the end of the multifunction control lever inward  
briefly for a single wipe without adding washer fluid.  
Use this feature only when the windshield is wet.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN  
WARNING!  
Unlock the steering column by pulling out the handle  
located directly below the column. The indicator light  
located in the instrument cluster will come on. To  
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull out or push  
in the steering wheel. Lock the steering column in  
position by pushing the handle in until it engages. The  
indicator light in the instrument cluster will go out.  
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. The  
telescoping adjustment must be locked while driv-  
ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving, or  
driving without the telescoping adjustment locked  
could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83  
NOTE: If the indicator light in the instrument cluster  
does not go out after starting the engine, the telescoping  
column is not locked properly. Do not drive the vehicle  
until you have properly locked the steering column.  
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM  
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be  
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation  
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on  
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your  
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated  
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you  
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for  
those tires.)  
3
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been  
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)  
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when on or  
more of your tires is significantly under—inflated. Ac-  
cordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates,  
you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible,  
and inflate them to the proper pressure, Driving on a  
significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-  
heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also  
reduced fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect  
the vehicles handling and stopping ability.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper  
tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to  
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has  
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS  
low tire pressure telltale.  
The Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system uses wireless  
technology to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors  
mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit  
tire pressure readings to a receiver located inside the  
vehicle.  
NOTE: The TPM system can inform you about a low  
tire pressure condition, but it does not replace normal tire  
maintenance. The TPM system is not intended to provide  
you with notification of rapid tire pressure loss.  
CAUTION!  
The TPM system is designed to monitor your tire  
pressure and will not function as a tire pressure  
gauge. After adjusting the air pressure in a tire, there  
will be a delay before the system updates the dis-  
play.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85  
The TPM system will cause the indicator lamp in the  
instrument cluster to illuminate whenever the pressure in  
one tire falls 25% below the recommended pressure  
shown on the vehicles tire label.  
NOTE: The pressure in your tires changes with tem-  
perature. A significant decrease in temperature could  
reduce cold inflation pressure below the TPM setpoint.  
For example, tires inflated to the proper cold inflation  
pressure on a warm day or in a warm garage could  
illuminate the TPM indicator lamp on the following day  
if the temperature is very cold. ALWAYS check the  
pressure in your tires if the TPM lamp is illuminated.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
In addition to monitoring tire pressures, the TPM system  
also monitors faults within the system. If the TPM light  
and alarm continue after the tire pressure has been  
corrected, see your authorized dealer.  
CAUTION!  
The TPM system has been optimized for the original  
equipment tires and wheels. TPM system pressures  
have been established for the tire size equipped on  
your vehicle. Undesirable operation or sensor dam-  
age may result when using replacement equipment  
that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.  
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do  
not use aftermarket tire sealant or balance beads, as  
damage to the sensors may result.  
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with  
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the  
following conditions:  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference that may be  
received, including interference that may cause undes-  
ired operation.  
NOTE: The standard TIREFIT system (refer to What To  
Do In Emergencies for more information) is specifically  
designed to operate in conjunction with the TPM system,  
and will not damage the sensors.  
NOTE: Changes and modifications not expressly ap-  
proved by the party responsible for compliance could  
void the users authority to operate the equipment.  
If your tire pressure is low, you should correct your tire  
inflation pressure as soon as possible and inspect all of  
your tires. Low tire pressure will cause the tire pressure  
light to illuminate and the alert will sound. They will  
remain on for the rest of the driving cycle, or until the tire  
pressure is corrected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87  
REAR SPOILER  
CAUTION!  
Do not push or pull on the spoiler when deployed.  
Damage to the spoiler could result.  
3
A rear spoiler enhances vehicle stability. The rear spoiler  
deploys automatically when vehicle speed reaches ap-  
proximately 62 mph (100 km/ h). The spoiler begins to  
retract at 39 mph (62 km/ h). When retracted, the spoiler  
fits between the quarter panels, and aft of the liftgate  
window or tonneau cover.  
The spoiler can also be deployed at lower speeds using  
an override switch mounted in the center console.  
Once manually deployed, the spoiler will only retract by  
pressing the bottom of the spoiler switch. The spoiler will  
then retract in steps as long as the switch is depressed. If  
the switch is depressed until the spoiler is fully retracted,  
a short beep will be heard, and automatic control will be  
reestablished.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
The spoiler control also incorporates an emergency stop  
feature. If, for any reason, spoiler motion needs to be  
stopped, pressing either the top or bottom of the switch  
will stop the spoiler motion. Once the deployment speed  
is reached, however, the spoiler deploys to its full up  
position.  
Should a malfunction occur that prevents the spoiler  
from deploying automatically, a red warning light will  
illuminate in the override switch and an audible warning  
will sound.  
The spoiler will deploy as a safety precaution if the ESP  
system detects a large difference in wheel speed between  
the front and rear wheels. This could occur as a result of  
a speed signal malfunction, or could occur if the vehicle  
is attempting to accelerate on a low friction surface  
causing the rear wheels to spin. The spoiler will remain  
deployed and the warning light in the spoiler switch will  
blink until the vehicle is restarted. If the spoiler continues  
to deploy in this fashion below the normal deployment  
speed, see your authorized dealer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89  
BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM (BAS)  
WARNING!  
Do not drive the vehicle at speeds above 62 mph (100  
km/h) if the red spoiler warning indicator is illumi-  
nated. You could have reduced vehicle stability and  
control.  
WARNING!  
BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from  
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking  
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of  
the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.  
The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those  
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following  
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a  
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-  
dents. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle  
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous  
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or  
the safety of others.  
3
WARNING!  
Keep hands and fingers away from the spoiler and  
spoiler linkage when the spoiler is deploying or  
retracting. The linkage could pinch your fingers and  
cause serious injury.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
The BAS is designed to maximize the vehicles braking  
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The  
system applies maximum power boost to the brakes  
more quickly in emergency braking conditions than  
might otherwise be afforded solely by the drivers brak-  
ing style. This can help reduce braking distances. The  
BAS complements the antilock brake system (ABS). Ap-  
plying the brakes very quickly results in maximum BAS  
assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must  
apply continuous full braking power during the stopping  
sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure.  
Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.  
The malfunction indicator lamp for the Electronic Stabil-  
ity Program is combined with the BAS. The yellow  
BAS/ ESP malfunction indicator light in the instrument  
cluster and the yellow ESP warning light in the speed-  
ometer dial come on with the key in the ignition switch  
turned to the ON/ RUN position. They should go out  
with the engine running. If the BAS/ ESP malfunction  
indicator light comes on continuously with the engine  
running, a malfunction has been detected in either sys-  
tem.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91  
If the malfunction indicator light stays illuminated, have  
the BAS and ESP checked at your authorized dealer as  
soon as possible.  
The ESP system corrects for over/ understeering of the  
vehicle by applying brakes to the appropriate wheel.  
Engine torque is also limited. The ESP warning light,  
located in the instrument cluster, starts to flash as soon as  
the tires lose traction and the wheels begin to spin.  
ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM (ESP)  
3
WARNING!  
ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from  
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction  
afforded. The ESP cannot prevent accidents, includ-  
ing those resulting from excessive speed in turns, or  
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful  
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an  
ESP-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a  
reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar-  
dize the user’s safety or the safety of others.  
The ESP enhances directional control and reduces driving  
wheel spin of the vehicle under various driving condi-  
tions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
To improve the vehicles traction when driving with  
snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or gravel,  
switch off the ESP system by pressing the upper half of  
the ESP switch.  
OFF position. If one drive wheel loses traction and begins  
to spin, the brake is applied by the ESP system until the  
wheel regains sufficient traction. The traction control  
engages at approximately 24 mph (40 km/ h), and  
switches off at 50 mph (80 km/ h).  
If the ESP warning light begins to flash during accelera-  
tion, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle  
as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to  
the prevailing road conditions. When the ESP warning  
light is illuminated continuously, the ESP is switched off.  
To return to the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP,  
press the lower half of the switch (the ESP warning light  
in the speedometer dial goes out). Avoid spinning one  
drive wheel. This may cause serious damage to the drive  
train and is not covered by the DaimlerChrysler war-  
ranty.  
With the ESP system switched off, the engine torque  
reduction feature is cancelled. Therefore, the enhanced  
vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable. ESP al-  
ways operates under braking, even with the switch in the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93  
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/ RUN position.  
2. Rotate the steering wheel to the center position.  
CAUTION!  
If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised, the  
engine must be shut off (key in the ignition switch to  
the OFF/LOCK or ACC position). Otherwise the ESP  
will immediately be engaged and will apply the rear  
wheel brakes.  
3. Rotate the steering wheel completely to the left, and  
then rotate the steering wheel completely to the right.  
3
4. Bring the steering wheel back to the center position.  
5. The BAS/ ESP malfunction indicator light will go out.  
If the BAS/ ESP malfunction indicator light is still illumi-  
nated, the vehicle should be serviced at an authorized  
dealer.  
Synchronizing ESP  
If the power supply was interrupted (battery discon-  
nected or discharged), the BAS/ ESP malfunction indica-  
tor light may be illuminated with the engine running. To  
re-synchronize the ESP, and cancel the malfunction indi-  
cator light, the steering angle sensor will need to be  
recalibrated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL  
The electronic speed control automatically maintains the  
set speed by actively regulating the throttle setting. Any  
speed above approximately 20 mph (30 km/ h) can be  
maintained with the electronic speed control by operat-  
ing the lever.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95  
To accelerate and set a speed, lift the lever up. Lift and  
hold the lever to accelerate, or lift and release to set a  
speed. To decelerate and set a speed, press the lever  
down. Press down and hold the lever to decelerate, or  
press down and release to set a speed.  
WARNING!  
Leaving the electronic speed control system on when  
not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set  
the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You  
could lose control and have an accident. Always  
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.  
3
To Vary The Speed Setting  
If a set speed needs to be adjusted slightly, lift up or hold  
down the speed control lever briefly until the desired  
speed is reached. A single tap on the lever up or down  
will change the speed in 0.6 mph (1 km/ h) increments.  
When the lever is released, the newly set speed remains.  
To increase the speed for passing, use the accelerator.  
After the accelerator is released, the previously set speed  
will resume automatically.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
To Deactivate  
To Resume Speed  
A soft tap on the brake pedal, or normal brake pressure  
while slowing the vehicle, will deactivate the speed  
control without erasing the memory. Pushing the speed  
control lever forward or turning the key in the ignition  
switch to the OFF/ LOCK position will turn off the speed  
control and erase the memory.  
To resume a previously set speed, pull the speed control  
lever toward you, and then release. The resume feature  
can be used at any speed above 20 mph (30 km/ h).  
NOTE: Moving the gear selector lever to the “N”  
position will switch the speed control off (automatic  
transmission only).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97  
Using Speed Control On Hills  
For vehicles with manual transmission:  
Your vehicle is equipped with interactive speed control.  
This feature activates when driving up or down hills with  
the speed control engaged and the drivers foot off the  
accelerator.  
The set speed control is switched off when declutching  
exceeds four seconds during downshifting. In some  
cases, you may have to step on the brake pedal to slow  
down sufficiently to achieve the desired speed.  
3
NOTE: On very steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain  
may occur. It may be preferable to drive without speed  
control.  
WARNING!  
Speed control can be dangerous where the system  
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could  
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose  
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use  
speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are  
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.  
GARAGE DOOR OPENER (If Equipped)  
The HomeLinkUniversal Transceiver replaces up to  
three remote controls (hand-held transmitters) that oper-  
ate devices such as garage door openers, motorized  
gates, or home lighting. The transceiver triggers these  
devices at the push of a button. The transceiver operates  
off your vehicles battery and charging system: no bat-  
teries are needed.  
For vehicles with automatic transmission:  
On a downgrade or an upgrade, downshifting will occur  
automatically to allow the engines braking power to  
maintain the set speed. When more level roadway is  
reached, the transmission will automatically upshift to  
fifth gear.  
For additional information on HomeLink, call 1–800–  
355–3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
WARNING!  
WARNING!  
A moving garage door can cause injury to people and  
pets in the path of the door. People or pets could be  
seriously or fatally injured. Only use this transceiver  
with a garage door opener that has a “stop and  
reverse” feature, as required by federal safety stan-  
dards. This includes most garage door opener mod-  
els manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage  
door opener without these safety features, as it could  
cause injury or death. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515  
or, on the internet at www.homelink.com for safety  
information and assistance.  
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-  
ous gas. Do not run the vehicle’s engine while  
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause  
serious injury or death.  
WARNING!  
Your motorized door or gate will open and close  
while you are programming the universal trans-  
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people or  
pets are in the path of the door or gate. A moving  
door or gate can cause serious injury or death to  
people and pets or damage to objects.  
Programming The Universal Transceiver  
For best results, install a new battery in the hand-held  
transmitter before programming. If your garage door  
opener (located in the garage) is equipped with an  
antenna, make sure that the antenna is hanging straight  
down.  
2. Turn the ignition to the ON/ RUN position.  
3. Erase the factory test codes by pressing the two  
outside buttons. Release the buttons when the light in the  
overhead console display begins to flash (about 20 sec-  
onds).  
1. Turn off the engine.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99  
NOTE: Step 3 does not have to be followed to program  
additional hand-held transmitters.  
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers  
may require you to replace this Programming Step 5 with  
procedures noted in the “Gate Operator/ Canadian Pro-  
gramming” section.  
4. Choose one of the three buttons to program. Place the  
hand-held controller 1–3 inches (25–76 mm) from the  
universal transceiver while keeping its indicator light in  
view.  
6. The indicator light in the universal transceiver will  
begin to flash, first slowly and then rapidly. Release both  
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to  
rapid flash. If, after 90 seconds, the indicator does not  
flash rapidly or goes out, return to Step 1 and repeat the  
procedure.  
3
7. Press and hold the just programmed universal trans-  
ceiver button and observe the indicator light. If the  
indicator stays on constantly, programming is complete  
and your device should activate when the universal  
transceiver button is pressed and released.  
NOTE: To program the remaining two universal trans-  
ceiver buttons, begin with Programming Step 4. Do not  
repeat Steps 1, 2, and 3.  
5. Using both hands, press the hand-held transmitter  
button and the desired universal transceiver button. Do  
not release the buttons until Step 6 has been completed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds  
and then turns to a constant light, continue with  
Programming Steps 8-10 to complete programming of  
a rolling code equipped device (most commonly a  
garage door opener).  
The universal transceiver should now activate your roll-  
ing code equipped device.  
If you do not successfully program the universal trans-  
ceiver to learn the signal of your hand-held transmitter,  
call toll free for customer assistance at 1-800-355-3515, or  
on the internet at www.homelink.com.  
8. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit)  
in the garage, locate the “learn” or “smart” button. This  
can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is  
attached to the motor-head unit.  
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming  
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-  
nals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of  
transmission. This may not be long enough for the  
universal transceiver to pick up the signal during pro-  
gramming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate  
operators are designed to “time-out” in the same manner.  
9. Firmly press and release the “learn” or “smart” but-  
ton. (The name and color of the button may vary by  
manufacturer.)  
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate Step 10.  
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties  
programming a gate operator by using the programming  
procedures (regardless of where you live), replace Pro-  
gramming Step 5 with the following:  
10. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two  
seconds and release the programmed universal trans-  
ceiver button. Repeat the “press/ hold/ release” sequence  
a second time, and, depending on the brand of the garage  
door opener (or other rolling code equipped device),  
repeat this sequence a third time to complete the pro-  
gramming.  
NOTE: If programming a garage door opener or gate  
operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the  
“cycling” process to prevent possible overheating.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101  
5. Continue to press and hold the universal transceiver  
button while you press and release every two seconds  
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the frequency  
signal has successfully been accepted by the universal  
transmitter. (The indicator light will flash slowly and  
then rapidly.) Proceed with Programming Step 6 to  
complete.  
than 30 seconds. The universal transceiver is now in  
the program (or learning) mode and can be pro-  
grammed at any time beginning with Programming  
Step 4.  
Reprogramming a Single Button  
To program a device using a universal transceiver button  
previously programmed, follow these steps:  
3
Using the Universal Transceiver  
1. Press and hold the desired universal transceiver but-  
ton. DO NOT release the button.  
To operate the universal transceiver, simply press and  
release the programmed button. Activation will now  
occur for the programmed device (i.e. garage door  
opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock,  
home/ office lighting, etc.) For convenience, the hand-  
held transmitter of the device may also be used at any  
time.  
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds.  
Without releasing the universal transceiver button, pro-  
ceed with Programming Step 4.  
Security  
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the frequencies.  
Erasing Universal Transceiver Buttons  
To erase programming from the three buttons (individual  
buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed – see  
below), follow this procedure:  
To erase all of the previously programmed frequencies,  
hold down both outside buttons until the light begins to  
flash.  
Press and hold the two outer universal transceiver  
buttons until the indicator light begins to flash after 20  
seconds. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with  
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the  
following conditions:  
UMBRELLA HOOK  
Your Crossfire is equipped with an umbrella hook. This  
feature is located behind and between the two seats, just  
above the map pocket.  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference that may be  
received, including interference that may cause undes-  
ired operation.  
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-  
proved by the party responsible for compliance could  
void the users authority to operate the equipment.  
HomeLinkis a trademark owned by Johnson Controls,  
Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
CONTENTS  
Instruments And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
Driver – L/ R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
Telephone Mute Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
Compact Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . 128  
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
Fan Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
Basic Setting - Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
Basic Setting - Air Conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . 130  
Dust Filter (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134  
4
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
Instrument Cluster Description . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
CD Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
User Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
User Memory (User – 1, 2, 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
Mono/ Stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
104 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105  
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER  
The instrument cluster displays are activated by either  
cluster, or turning the key in the ignition switch to the  
ON/ RUN position.  
opening the door, pressing the left button within the  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
106 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 107  
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION  
WARNING!  
1. Low Windshield Washer System Fluid Level  
Warning Light  
Do not overfill the washer reservoir. Do not attempt  
to fill to the top of the filler neck. Fluid may leak out  
onto the floor or driveway causing a potential slip  
and fall hazard. When the indicator light first illu-  
minates, the maximum fill amount is 1 Gallon (4  
Liters).  
With the key in the ignition switch turned to  
the ON/ RUN position, the indicator light  
comes on. It should go out when the engine  
is running.  
4
If the indicator light does not go out after starting the  
engine, or if it comes on while driving, the fluid reservoir  
is less than 4 filled.  
2. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp  
The tire pressure monitor system (TPMS)  
uses wireless technology to monitor tire  
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each  
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire  
pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.  
1
The reservoir should be refilled at the next opportunity  
with commercially available premixed windshield  
washer solvent/ antifreeze or water, depending on ambi-  
ent temperature.  
The reservoir for the windshield washer system is located  
in the engine compartment and the cap is marked with  
the above symbol.  
If the light is illuminated, the pressure in one of the tires  
on the vehicle has dropped to at least 25% below the  
recommended pressure on the vehicles tire label. Addi-  
tionally, the indicator light will illuminate if a fault has  
been detected in the TPMS.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
108 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
To check the coolant level, the vehicle must be parked on  
level ground and the engine stopped.  
CAUTION!  
The TPMS is designed to monitor your tire pressure  
and will not function as a tire pressure gauge. After  
adjusting the air pressure in a tire, there will be a  
delay before the system updated the display  
Check coolant level only when the coolant is cold.  
WARNING!  
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or  
steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam  
coming from under the hood, don’t open the hood  
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to  
open a cooling system pressure cap when the radia-  
tor or coolant bottle is hot.  
NOTE: The TPMS can inform you about a low tire  
pressure condition, but it does not replace normal tire  
maintenance. The TPMS is not intended to provide you  
with notification of a rapid pressure loss.  
NOTE: The pressure in your tires changes with tem-  
perature. A significant decrease in temperature could  
reduce cold inflation pressure below the TPMS setpoint.  
ALWAYS check pressure in your tires if the TPMS telltale  
lamp is illuminated.  
4. Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge  
This gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any read-  
ing between the Hot and Cold gauge marks show that the  
engine cooling system is operating properly. The gauge  
pointer may show a higher temperature when driving in  
hot weather, up mountain grades, or in heavy stop-and-  
go-traffic.  
3. Coolant Indicator Light  
This indicator illuminates when the engine  
coolant has dropped below the required  
level in the reservoir or the coolant tempera-  
ture is too high (see the Temperature gauge  
section).  
If the pointer rises to the red (Hot) area, stop the vehicle  
and turn off the engine until the problem is corrected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109  
The arrows in the instrument cluster will flash in unison  
with the respective exterior turn signal.  
CAUTION!  
Continuing to drive with an overheated engine cool-  
ing system can cause damage to the engine or other  
components.  
7. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator  
Light  
The yellow ESP indicator light in the speedom-  
eter dial comes on with the key in the ignition  
switch turned to the ON/ RUN position. It  
should go out with the engine running.  
5. Fuel Gauge  
4
When the ignition is in the ON/ RUN position, the  
pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the tank.  
The arrow to the right of the gas pump symbol shows  
which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located on.  
If the ESP indicator light flashes during acceleration,  
apply as little throttle as possible. While driving, ease up  
on the accelerator. Adapt your speed and driving to the  
prevailing road conditions, and do not switch off the ESP.  
6. Turn Signal Indicators  
To signal minor directional changes, such as  
changing lanes, move the multifunction con-  
trol lever to the point of resistance only and  
hold it there. The arrows will flash in unison  
with the corresponding exterior turn signal.  
8. Speedometer  
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles-per-  
hour and/ or kilometers-per-hour.  
9. Tachometer  
This gauge shows engine speed in revolutions-per-  
minute (RPM) times 1,000.  
To operate the turn signals continuously, move the mul-  
tifunction control lever past the point of resistance up or  
down. The switch is automatically canceled when the  
steering wheel is turned to a large enough degree.  
The red markings on the tachometer indicate excessive  
engine speed. Ease off on the accelerator before reaching  
the red area.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
110 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
10. Brake System Warning Light  
WARNING!  
The dual brake system provides a reserve  
braking capability if a failure occurs in a  
portion of the hydraulic system.  
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-  
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will  
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an  
accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.  
This light monitors both the brake fluid level and the  
parking brake. If the light comes on, it indicates either  
that the parking brake is on or there is a low fluid level in  
the brake master cylinder. Since this vehicle is equipped  
with anti-lock brakes (ABS), the brake light may also  
indicate reduced braking performance due to the loss of  
electronic brake proportioning. If the parking brake is off  
and the light remains on, have the brake system in-  
spected as soon as possible.  
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is  
on. It does not show the degree of brake application.  
The brake warning light will come on if the ABS light is  
not functioning and there is an ABS system malfunction.  
11. Light Outage Indicator  
With the key in the ignition switch turned to  
the ON/ RUN position, an indicator light  
comes on. It should go out when the engine  
is running. If the indicator light does not go  
out after starting the engine, or if it comes on while  
driving, it indicates a failure in the parking light,  
taillight, stoplight, low beam headlight, or other exte-  
rior lamps.  
The warning light should be checked frequently to assure  
that it is operating properly. This can be done by turning  
the ignition switch to START. The light should come on.  
If the red brake light does not come on when the ignition  
is turned to the ON/ RUN position, have the brake  
warning light repaired promptly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 111  
The indicator light will come on when the exterior light  
fails. If a brake light fails, the light outage indicator will  
come on when applying the brake and stays on until the  
engine is turned off.  
13. Brake Assist Indicator Light  
The indicator light for the Brake Assist Sys-  
tem (BAS) is combined with the Electronic  
Stability Program (ESP). This yellow indica-  
tor light in the instrument cluster comes on with the  
key in the ignition switch turned to the ON/ RUN  
position. The BAS/ ESP warning indicator light also  
comes on when a malfunction is detected in either the  
Brake Assist System or the Electronic Stability Pro-  
gram. It should go out with the engine running. If the  
BAS/ ESP indicator light comes on continuously, see  
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.  
NOTE: If additional lighting equipment is installed  
(e.g., auxiliary headlights, etc.) be certain to connect into  
the fuse before the failure indicator monitoring unit in  
order to avoid damaging the system.  
4
12. Antilock Warning Indicator Light  
The ABS warning indicator light comes on  
with the key in the ignition switch turned to  
the ON/ RUN position, and should go out  
with the engine running.  
14. Seat Belt Indicator Light  
With the key in the ignition, the light comes  
on, and a warning sounds for a short time if  
the drivers seat belt is not fastened.  
If the ABS warning indicator light comes on while the  
engine is running, it indicates that the ABS has detected  
a malfunction and has switched off. In this case, the brake  
system functions in the usual manner, but without an-  
tilock assistance.  
After starting the engine, the seat belt indicator light  
blinks and a chime sounds periodically for up to 90  
seconds to remind the driver and passenger to fasten the  
seat belts. Fastening the seat belts will extinguish the  
light and silence the chime.  
If the ABS light is on, have the system checked at your  
authorized dealer as soon as possible.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
112 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
The seat belt indicator light will remain lit until the seat  
belts are fastened.  
CAUTION!  
The accessory drive belt also drives the water pump.  
Operating the vehicle with a failed belt can cause  
engine overheating and possible severe engine dam-  
age.  
15. Charging System Indicator Light  
Should the charging system indicator light  
fail to come on prior to starting when the key  
is in the ignition switch in the ON/ RUN  
position, or should it fail to go out after  
starting or during operation, it indicates a malfunction  
that must be repaired immediately at an authorized  
dealer.  
16. High Beam Indicator Light  
This indicator will illuminate when the  
headlights are in the high beam setting.  
If the charging system indicator light comes on, or a loss  
of power steering assistance is noticeable while the  
engine is running, this may indicate that the accessory  
drive belt has broken. Should this condition occur, the  
belt must be replaced before continuing to operate the  
vehicle.  
To activate the high beams, push the multifunction  
control lever past the point of resistance, toward the  
instrument panel.  
17. Electronic Digital Clock  
A digital readout in the instrument cluster shows the  
time in hours and minutes whenever the ignition switch  
is in the ON/ RUN or ACC position.  
When the ignition switch is in the OFF/ LOCK position,  
timekeeping is accurately maintained.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 113  
The display can be adjusted with the knob/ button lo-  
cated to the left of the clock.  
Press the button twice (with the key removed or in  
the OFF/ LOCK or ACC position).  
18. Gear Indicator  
21. Main Odometer, Flexible Service System (FSS)  
For automatic transmission vehicles, the current gear  
shift selector range is indicated in the gear range indica-  
tor display.  
This shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven.  
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of  
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the  
correct distance that the vehicle has been driven. There-  
fore, if the odometer reading is changed during repair or  
replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading  
before and after service so that the correct distance can be  
determined.  
4
19. Push Button for Time Setting  
To adjust the time display, turn the key in the ignition  
switch to the ON/ RUN or ACC position. The knob/  
button located just to the left of the clock is used to  
change the time. Pull out the knob and turn it to the left  
for hour adjustment; pull out the knob and turn it to the  
right for minute adjustment.  
22. Push Button for Activating the Instrument  
Cluster, Intensity of Instrument Lights, for Resetting  
Trip Odometer and Flexible Service System (FSS)  
Indicator  
Press the knob/ button to illuminate the display. To vary  
the intensity of the instrument cluster lights, rotate the  
knob/ button.  
Time is set 5 seconds after adjusting the minute setting.  
20. Trip Odometer, Flexible Service System (FSS)  
Indicator  
This display shows the distance traveled since last reset.  
To reset:  
Press the button to the left of the display once (with  
the key in the ON/ RUN position).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
114 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
To reset the trip odometer, press the knob/ button once  
with the key in the ON/ RUN position. Press the knob/  
button twice with the key removed or in the OFF/ LOCK  
or ACC position.  
The counter can also be reset by any individual after the  
indicated service has been performed. To do so:  
1. Turn key to the ON/ RUN position.  
2. Within one second press the knob/ button twice.  
The FSS permits a flexible service schedule that is directly  
related to the operating conditions of the vehicle.  
There are two symbols which will appear in the  
main odometer display field prior to the next  
suggested service. This symbol represents Ser-  
vice A.  
3. The present status for days or distance is dis-  
played. Within 10 seconds turn the key to OFF/  
LOCK.  
4. Press and hold the knob/ button, while turning  
the key to ON/ RUN again. The present status for  
days or distance is displayed once more. Continue  
to hold the knob/ button.  
This second symbol represents Service B.  
After approximately 10 seconds, a signal sounds and  
the display shows 7,000 miles (Canada: 11,000 km) for  
approximately 10 seconds.  
Depending on operating conditions through-  
out the year, the next service is calculated and  
displayed next to this symbol in days remain-  
ing before the next service is required.  
5. Release the knob/ button.  
Likewise, the next service may be calculated  
and displayed next to this symbol as distance  
remaining before the next service is required.  
If the FSS counter was inadvertently reset, have an  
authorized dealer correct it.  
The message is displayed for approximately 10 sec-  
onds when turning the key to the ON/ RUN position,  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 115  
or while driving when reaching the service warning  
threshold. It can be canceled manually by pressing the  
knob/ button.  
starts combined with short distance driving in which the  
engine does not reach normal operating temperature,  
reduce the interval between services.  
Once the suggested term has passed, the message plus  
either the symbol for Service A or the symbol for  
Service B preceded by a – (minus symbol) blinks for  
approximately 30 seconds and a signal sounds every  
time when turning the key to the ON/ RUN position.  
However you choose to set your reference numbers, the  
scheduled services as posted in the Service Booklet must  
be followed to properly care for your vehicle.  
4
23. Outside Temperature Display  
The temperature display is located on the left side of the  
instrument cluster, below the fuel and engine tempera-  
ture gauges.  
The FSS display can also be called up for approxi-  
mately 10 seconds with the display illuminated by  
pressing the knob/ button twice within one second.  
The sensor for the outside temperature indicator is  
located in the front fascia area. Due to its location, the  
sensor can be affected by road or engine heat during  
idling or slow driving. This means that the accuracy of  
the displayed temperature can only be verified by com-  
parison to a thermometer placed next to the sensor, not  
by comparison to external displays (e.g., bank signs, etc.).  
Following a completed A or B service your authorized  
dealer sets the counter to 7,000 miles (Canada: 11,000  
km).  
NOTE: When disconnecting vehicle battery for one or  
more days at a time, such days will not be counted. Any  
such days not counted by FSS can be added by your  
authorized dealer.  
Adaptation to ambient temperature takes place in steps  
and depends on the prevailing driving conditions (stop-  
and- go or moderate, constant driving) and amount of  
temperature change.  
The interval between services is determined by the type  
of vehicle operation. Driving at extreme speeds, and cold  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
116 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
the bulb is not lit during starting, have it replaced. If the  
light stays on, or comes on while driving, have the  
system checked by an authorized dealer.  
WARNING!  
The outside temperature indicator is not designed to  
serve as an ice-warning device and is unsuitable for  
that purpose. Indicated temperatures just above the  
freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface  
is free of ice.  
WARNING!  
In the event a malfunction of the airbag is indicated,  
the airbag may not be operational. For your safety,  
we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized  
dealer immediately to have the system checked;  
otherwise the airbag may not be activated when  
needed in an accident, which could result in serious  
or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and  
unnecessarily which could also result in injury.  
24. Airbag Light  
The operational readiness of the airbag sys-  
tem is verified by the airbag indicator light  
in the instrument cluster when turning the  
key in the ignition switch to the ACC or  
ON/ RUN position. If no fault is detected, the light  
will go out after approximately 4 seconds. After the  
lamp goes out, the system continues to monitor the  
components and circuitry of the airbag system and  
will indicate a malfunction by coming on again.  
25. Telescoping Wheel Indicator Light  
With the key in the ignition and turned to the  
ON/ RUN position, the indicator light in the  
instrument cluster comes on. It should go  
out when the engine is running. If the indi-  
cator light does not go out after starting the engine, the  
telescoping steering column is not locked properly.  
The light will come on and remain on for 4 seconds as a  
bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. If  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 117  
If the vehicle is not driving normally, and the Check  
Engine light flashes or remains on continuously, it is an  
alert to serious conditions that could lead to loss of power  
or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should  
be serviced at an authorized dealer as soon as possible.  
WARNING!  
Do not drive the vehicle until you have properly  
locked the steering column.  
26. Check Engine Light  
27. Brake Wear Indicator Light  
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic  
system that monitors the emissions and en-  
gine control systems. If a problem is detected in one of  
these systems, the Check Engine light will come on.  
The light comes on and stays on briefly as a bulb check  
when the ignition is first turned on.  
With the key in the ignition and turned to the  
ON/ RUN position, the brake wear indicator  
light comes on. The light goes out when the  
engine is running.  
4
If the indicator light comes on during braking, this  
indicates the brake pads are worn down.  
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, or  
poor fuel quality may illuminate the light after the engine  
is started. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time you  
refuel.  
Have the brake system checked at your authorized dealer  
as soon as possible.  
28. Oil Level Indicator Light  
With the key in the ignition switch turned to  
the ON/ RUN position, the oil level indicator  
light comes on. It should go out immediately  
when the engine is running. If the light does  
not go out, or comes on while driving, the engine oil  
level has dropped to approximately the minimum  
mark on the dipstick.  
If the Check Engine light remains on continuously and  
the vehicle is driving normally, you may still drive the  
vehicle. In most situations, the vehicle will not require  
towing. However, we recommend that you have the  
system checked at an authorized dealer as soon as  
possible.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
118 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL  
The indicated amount of oil must be added to the engine  
if the message -2.0 Q (-2.0L) blinks and a signal sounds.  
The HI message indicates that the excess oil must be  
removed from the pan to avoid possible engine or  
catalytic converter damage. If the ISO oil level icon and  
“clock” icon remain on when attempting to check oil  
level and no message follows, or if the low engine oil  
level warning lamp comes on, a malfunction in the  
engine oil level system is indicated. A conveniently  
located dipstick allows manual checking of the oil level.  
A sensor in the oil pan allows oil level to be checked  
without opening the hood. It provides an accurate mea-  
surement of oil level, whereas the low engine oil level  
indicator warns that oil level is definitely too low. With  
the vehicle parked on a level surface, the engine is  
warmed up and shut off for approximately five minutes.  
When the ignition switch is turned to the ON/ RUN  
position, an ISO oil level icon appears in the trip odom-  
eter window and a “clock” icon in the cumulative  
odometer display. Pressing the knob to the left of the  
speedometer twice within one second displays one of the  
following messages:  
If no leaks are noted, continue to drive to the nearest  
service station where the engine oil should be topped to  
the “full” mark on the dipstick with an approved oil.  
OK  
29. Low Fuel Warning Light  
When the fuel level drops to about 2 gallons (7.5  
liters), this symbol will light and remains lit until  
fuel is added.  
-1.0 Q (-1.0L)  
-1.5 Q (-1.5L)  
-2.0 Q (-2.0L)  
HI  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 119  
“INFINITY MODULUS” AM/FM STEREO RADIO  
WITH SINGLE-DISC CD PLAYER AND GPS  
NAVIGATION  
(OPTIONAL - See separate Users Manual)  
AM/FM STEREO RADIO WITH SINGLE-DISC CD  
PLAYER  
4
INFINITY MODULUS Entertainment Systems  
A premium Infinity Modulus AM/ FM stereo, single-disc  
CD audio system is standard equipment on some mod-  
els. It feeds a six-channel, 240-watt amplifier with dual  
subwoofers mounted in the back panel behind the seats,  
and four door-mounted speakers. These systems can be  
identified by the Infinity brand mark on the radio face-  
plate.  
Power/Volume Control  
To activate the audio system, press the ON/ OFF knob on  
the left. If the unit was switched off using the ignition  
switch, it will switch on again with the ignition switch.  
Press the ON/ OFF knob within three seconds of turning  
the ignition switch off to prevent the radio from switch-  
ing off.  
The unit can also be operated without the ignition switch  
turned on by pressing the ON/ OFF knob, but it will  
switch off automatically after one hour.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
120 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
The volume is controlled by rotating the ON/ OFF knob  
to the left or right.  
AUD button for more than 4 seconds until FM LIN-  
EAR appears (which affects FM only). Press and hold  
the AUD button for more than eight seconds until ALL  
LINEAR appears (which affects both radio and CD).  
Audio (AUD) Settings  
Bass (BASS)  
Mute function (MUTE)  
Press the AUD button repeatedly until BASS appears.  
Rotate the right rotary control for the desired level  
(from -9 to +9).  
To activate the mute function in all modes and wave-  
bands, press the TP button. The mute function is  
cancelled by either pressing the TP button again, or by  
turning the volume control.  
Treble (TREB)  
Press the AUD button repeatedly until TREB appears.  
Rotate the right rotary control for the desired level  
(from -9 to +9).  
NOTE: After six seconds without any action, or by  
pressing OPT, CD, AM, FM, or TP, the current setting is  
cancelled, and the new setting is stored.  
Balance (BAL)  
FM1 – FM2 – FM AS – BEST FM  
The system has four FM memory modes that can be  
selected by repeatedly pressing the FM button.  
Press the AUD button repeatedly until BAL appears.  
Rotate the right rotary control for the desired level  
(from -9 to +9).  
FM1 – One of ten memorized FM station frequencies can  
be selected by pressing a multifunction button.  
Linear adjustment (LINEAR)  
FM2 – A second set of ten memorized FM station  
frequencies can be selected by pressing a multifunction  
button.  
The tone values for the set signal source (e.g., radio/  
FM) are set to “0” (mean value). Press and hold the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 121  
FM AS – An autostore feature will store the 9 current  
stations with the strongest signal on station buttons 1-9 in  
the order of their signal quality.  
Storing FM stations – 10 frequencies can be stored on FM 1  
and on FM 2 by pressing a multifunction button for three  
seconds; a tone will confirm that the selection was set.  
Press the FM button repeatedly until FM AS is displayed  
to perform an autostore scan. Press the multifunction  
button labeled AS repeatedly until AS-SEEK is displayed.  
To select the stored stations, press the 1-9 buttons.  
Scan Search FM (SC) – To activate, press the right rotary  
control/ push button until SC is displayed.  
Beginning with the currently set frequency, the next  
station scanned will be heard for eight seconds. Press the  
right rotary control/ push button if you wish to keep the  
current station. Once the scan begins, it will continue  
until either a station or program is retained or until  
another mode is selected.  
4
BEST FM – The BEST FM function automatically memo-  
rizes and continuously updates the frequencies of sta-  
tions in order of their signal strength.  
The strongest station comes up first when BEST FM is  
selected. Stations with stronger or weaker signals are  
selected by turning the right rotary knob.  
Radio Data System (RDS) Stations  
PTY (Program Type)  
To select the displayed station, press the right rotary  
control/ push button.  
The program type of the selected station can be displayed  
for 10 seconds, or scanned in order of ascending fre-  
quency for eight seconds each.  
Tuning FM stations – Rotating the right rotary control to  
the right or left will change the FM frequency to the next  
higher or lower station with a strong signal. To manually  
step through each frequency or tune in a station with a  
weaker signal, press the MAN button first, and then  
rotate the rotary control right or left.  
To activate, press the OPT button in FM mode, then press  
the multifunction PT button. You can pre-select one of the  
currently available PTY by turning the right rotary control/  
push button and the program type scan search begins.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
122 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Press the button again to keep the received program. If  
the selected station does not transmit a PTY identifica-  
tion, the display will show NO PTY. If all criteria for  
evaluating RDS are not met, the unit will only display the  
frequency.  
SOFT R B – Soft R&B  
ADLT HIT – Adult Hits  
LANGUAGE – Language Program  
SOFT RCK – Soft Rock  
The following are examples of program types displayed:  
REL MUSC – Religious Music  
TOP 40 – Top 40  
NEWS – News Service  
SOFT – Soft Music  
REL TALK – Religious Talk  
COUNTRY – Country Music  
PERSNLTY – Personality  
OLDIES – Oldies Format  
PUBLIC – Public Radio  
INFORM – Information Programs  
NOSTALGA – Nostalgia  
SPORTS – Sports Reports  
JAZZ – Jazz Music  
TALK – Talk Programs  
CLASSICL – Classical  
ROCK – Rock Music  
R B – R&B  
WEATHER – Weather Forecast  
PTY 24-28 – Not Specified  
NO PTY – No Program Type  
CLS ROCK – Classic Rock  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 123  
AM-AM AS  
repeatedly until AM AS is displayed to perform an  
autostore scan. Press the multifunction button labeled AS  
repeatedly until AS-SEEK is displayed. To select the  
stored stations, press the 1-9 buttons.  
The system has two AM modes available. Press the AM  
button repeatedly until the band or operation mode is  
selected. To search in this mode, press the right rotary  
control/ push button and the abbreviation SC is dis-  
played. Receivable stations can be heard for eight sec-  
onds. Press the control again to keep the received station.  
General Information  
This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with  
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the  
following conditions:  
4
Once the scan search begins, it will continue until either  
a station is retained or until another mode is selected.  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,  
Tuning AM stations – Rotating the right rotary control to  
the right or left will change the AM frequency to the next  
higher or lower station with a strong signal. To manually  
step through each frequency or tune in a station with a  
weaker signal, press the MAN button first, and then  
rotate the rotary control right or left.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired opera-  
tion.  
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-  
proved by the party responsible for compliance could  
void the users authority to operate the equipment.  
Storing AM stations – 10 frequencies can be stored on AM  
by pressing a multifunction button for three seconds; a  
tone will confirm that the selection was set.  
CD Player Operation  
To activate the CD function, press the CD button; CDS is  
shown in the display. If no CD disc is present, the display  
briefly shows NO CDS and the radio mode remains  
active.  
AM AS – An autostore feature will store the 9 current  
stations with the strongest signal on station buttons 1-9 in  
the order of their signal quality. Press the AM button  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
124 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Features of the CD player:  
CAUTION!  
Skipping Tracks  
Before inserting a CD, assure that a CD is not already  
in the player. Press the CD button; if the display  
shows NO CDS, a new CD can be inserted. If a CD  
is already loaded, press and release the EJT button  
and allow time for the current CD to be ejected.  
Loading a new CD into the player while another CD  
is already loaded can result in a jammed mechanism  
which may require service at an authorized dealer.  
Turn the right rotary control/ push button. Turn fur-  
ther to the left or right to skip multiple tracks. If a track  
was played for less than eight seconds, the system will  
skip to the next track.  
Scan Tracks (SC)  
Push the right rotary control/ push button until the  
display shows SC. All tracks are played back for eight  
seconds each. Press the button again to cancel this  
feature.  
Insert the CD into the slot with the printed side up. The  
unit will display the number of tracks and total playback  
time. After the last track has been played back, the unit  
automatically begins to play the first track again.  
Fast Forward/Rewind (<<, >>)  
Press and hold the multifunction button >> for audible  
fast forward play. Press and hold the multifunction  
button << for audible fast rewind play. The relative  
time is displayed during this operation and continues  
for an additional eight seconds after releasing the  
function button.  
To eject a disc, briefly press and release the  
EJT button.  
If the power is turned off, the disc will remain in the CD  
slot for protection.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125  
Relative Time Display (T)  
DRIVER – Left/ Right Hand Drive Setting  
PHONE – Telephone Characteristics  
Press the multifunction button T for the time of the  
currently playing track to be displayed for approxi-  
mately eight seconds.  
To enter the USER menu, press the OPT button for more  
than three seconds. USER then appears on the display,  
and another user action must be entered within six  
seconds or this menu is exited automatically. Your cur-  
rent setting can be cancelled and the selections made will  
be saved by pressing either the CD, AM, FM or TP  
buttons momentarily.  
Random Play (RP)  
Press the multifunction button RP for random genera-  
tion of the next track to be played. Press the button  
again to cancel the feature.  
4
NOTE: To protect the unit from excessive heat, a  
temperature protection device has been integrated into  
the circuitry. When a high operating temperature is  
detected, CD TEMP is displayed for eight seconds and  
the unit switches back to the last source (AM or FM).  
Allow sufficient cool down time and retry.  
User Memory (USER – 1, 2, 3)  
You can program up to three user memories, which saves  
the sound settings, and the last received station when the  
unit is switched off. To activate, first enter the user menu.  
One of the three users can now be selected by turning the  
right rotary/ push button. You can also call up the  
Mono/ Stereo setting by pressing the right rotary/ push  
button at this time.  
User Menu  
The following functions can be customized to your  
personal needs in the user menu:  
USER – User Memory  
M/ S – Mono/ Stereo Setting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
126 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Mono/Stereo  
Driver – L/R  
In order to suppress reception-related interference, three  
different parameters can be set to optimize reception.  
If a telephone with hands-free operation is installed, the  
call is routed through the speaker system. The setting  
DRIVER is used to set the appropriate speaker side (left  
or right).  
To activate, call up the user menu, then press the right  
rotary control/ push button repeatedly until STEREO,  
STO AUTO or MONO is displayed (depending on the  
currently selected setting, you may need to turn the knob  
also for your selection).  
To activate, call up the user menu, then press the right  
rotary control/ push button repeatedly until DRIVER L or  
DRIVER R is displayed (depending on the currently  
selected setting, you may need to turn the knob also for  
your selection). You can also call up the Telephone mute  
characteristics mode by pressing the right rotary/ push  
button at this time.  
STO AUTO – Setting for normal operation. The unit  
switches from stereo to mono and back, depending on  
the reception conditions (for nearly all reception areas,  
this is the optimal setting).  
Telephone mute characteristics  
STEREO – Setting for exceptional conditions. The unit  
is constantly set for stereo reception (primarily for  
private broadcasters in urban areas).  
If a telephone with hands-free operation is installed, the  
call may be routed through the speaker system. This  
eliminates the need for an additional speaker (if the  
signal lines are connected to the unit). The following  
settings are available:  
MONO – Setting for receptions with constant reflec-  
tion, the unit is constantly set for monaural reception.  
You can also call up the Setting DRIVER mode by  
pressing the right rotary/ push button at this time.  
PH MUTE – Switching radio to mute.  
AUDIO PH – Telephone call via the car radio.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127  
Call up the user menu, then press the right rotary  
control/ push button repeatedly until AUDIO PH or PH  
MUTE is displayed (depending on the currently selected  
setting, you may need to turn the knob also for your  
selection).  
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become  
too high.  
RADIO ANTENNA  
The radio antenna is located in the rear liftgate glass on  
the coupe vehicles and mounted on the left rear body  
panel on the roadster vehicles. The antenna requires no  
maintenance.  
COMPACT DISC MAINTENANCE  
To keep the compact discs in good condition, take the  
following precautions:  
4
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the  
surface.  
CAUTION!  
Window tint films applied to the liftgate glass of  
coupe vehicles can significantly degrade radio recep-  
tion if they contain any metallic content. Before  
applying any film to increase occupant privacy or  
reduce the heating effect of the sun, make sure that  
the film does not contain any metallic substances.  
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,  
wiping from center to edge.  
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-  
ing the disc.  
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,  
or antistatic sprays.  
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.  
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
128 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES  
Under certain conditions, the operation of a cellular  
phone in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy perfor-  
mance from your radio. This condition may be lessened  
or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna.  
This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio  
performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repo-  
sitioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio  
volume be turned down or off during cellular phone  
operation.  
1. Driver Temperature Control  
2. Passenger Temperature Control  
3. Fan Speed Control  
4. Air Recirculation/ REST  
5. Air Conditioning ON/ OFF  
6. Rear Window Defroster  
7. Air Distribution (Mode) Control  
The climate control system allows you to balance the  
temperature, amount and direction of the air circulating  
throughout the vehicle.  
CLIMATE CONTROLS  
The system is always at operational readiness, except  
when manually switched off. The climate control only  
operates with the engine running.  
The climate control removes a considerable amount of  
moisture from the air during operation in the air condi-  
tioning mode, therefore it is considered normal operation  
for water to drip on the ground through ducts in the  
underbody.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129  
The settings and controls are as follows:  
Basic Setting - Heater  
Select a temperature for each side of the pas-  
senger compartment. Select air volume with  
the fan control switch and set the fan control at  
least to position 2 to prevent windows from  
fogging up. Set the air distribution control switch to the  
tri-level setting. Turn the defroster outlets for the side  
windows to the detent positions. Open center air outlets  
as desired.  
Temperature Control  
Use the driver or passenger temperature control to  
regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger  
compartment. The blue area of the control indicates  
cooler temperatures, while the red area indicates warmer  
temperatures.  
4
The temperature selector should be left at the desired  
temperature setting so that the system can automatically  
reach that selection as quickly as possible. The inside  
temperature will not heat or cool any quicker by setting  
the selector higher or lower upon initial start up.  
Select a temperature for each side of the pas-  
senger compartment. Select air volume with  
the fan control switch. Then select the panel  
setting on the air distribution control switch to  
force air from the panel outlets.  
Fan Control  
Use this control to regulate the amount of air  
volume moving through the system in any  
mode you select. Turn the control clockwise to  
increase fan speed; counterclockwise to de-  
crease fan speed.  
Select a temperature for each side of the pas-  
senger compartment. Select air volume with  
the fan control switch. Then select the Bi-Level  
setting on the air distribution control switch to  
force air from both the upper panel outlets and the floor  
outlets.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
130 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Basic Setting - Air Conditioner  
NOTE: The dot between the air distribution control  
Press the air conditioning ON/ OFF switch. The  
light in the switch will illuminate. Select a  
temperature for each side of the passenger  
compartment. Select the air volume with the  
fan control switch, at least to position 1. Set the air  
distribution control switch to one of the positions shown  
above. Open center air outlets. Open left and right side  
air outlets.  
icons is a mix position between the two modes.  
Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed  
when the compressor is on. This is a normal occurrence,  
since the compressor will cycle on and off to maintain  
comfort and increase fuel economy.  
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems  
lower than expected, check the front of the A/ C con-  
denser for an accumulation of dirt or insects.  
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not run if  
the fan control switch is not set to position 1 or higher.  
Defrosting  
Set the temperature selectors to the maximum  
heating position, set the fan control to position 5,  
and the air distribution to the defrost position. Close the  
center air outlets. Close the left and right side air outlets.  
Turn the defroster outlets for the side windows to the  
detent position.  
Defogging Windows Fogged Up On Inside  
Press the A/ C button; the indicator light should illumi-  
nate. Switch off the air recirculation; the indicator light  
should go out. Set the air distribution control switch to  
the defrost position. Increase air volume with the fan  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131  
control switch to position 1 or higher. Close the center,  
left, and right side air outlets. Turn the defroster outlets  
for the side windows to the detent position.  
Windshield Fogged Up On Outside  
Switch on the windshield wipers. Set the air distribution  
control switch to the defrost position. Increase air volume  
with the fan control switch. Close the center and right  
side air outlets. Turn the defroster outlets for the side  
windows to the detent position.  
NOTE: The air conditioner removes moisture from the  
air inside your vehicle. The quickest and most efficient  
method for defogging your windows, even if the air  
temperature in your vehicle is cool, is to use the air  
conditioner. Make sure that you press the A/ C button to  
defog your windows.  
Ventilation  
4
To receive outside air through the panel outlets, turn off  
the Air Conditioning ON/ OFF switch. The light in the  
switch should be off. Set the controls as above for basic  
air conditioning.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
132 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Climate Control - OFF  
inside the switch starts blinking. As soon as the battery  
has sufficient voltage, the defroster automatically turns  
itself back on.  
To switch the climate control off, set the air volume  
control switch to position 0. The fresh air supply to the  
vehicle interior is shut off. While driving, use this setting  
only temporarily, otherwise the windshield could fog up.  
CAUTION!  
Rear Window Defroster  
To avoid damaging the electrical conductors, do not  
use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window  
cleaners on the interior surface of the rear window.  
Labels can be peeled off by soaking with warm  
water.  
Turn the key in the ignition switch to the  
ON/ RUN position. To select, press the rear  
window defroster button once and release. The  
indicator light in the switch should illuminate.  
To cancel, press the rear window defroster button again  
and release.  
Air Recirculation/REST  
NOTE: Heavy accumulation of snow and ice should be  
removed before activating the defroster. The rear win-  
dow defroster uses a large amount of power. To keep the  
battery drain to a minimum, turn off the defroster as soon  
as the window is clear. The defroster is automatically  
turned off after a maximum of 12 minutes of operation.  
This mode can be selected to temporarily re-  
duce the entry of annoying odors or dust into  
the vehicles interior. Outside air does not flow  
into the vehicles interior. To select, press the  
recirculation button. To cancel, press the recirculation  
button again.  
If several components in the vehicle are consuming  
power simultaneously, or the battery is only partially  
charged, it is possible that the defroster will automati-  
cally turn itself off. When this happens, the indicator light  
The system will automatically switch from recirculated  
air to fresh air after approximately five minutes at  
outside temperatures below approximately 40°F (5°C);  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133  
after approximately 30 minutes, at outside temperatures  
above approximately 40°F (5°C); after approximately five  
minutes, if the A/ C button is pressed.  
To cancel, press the recirculation button. The indicator  
light in the button goes out. The system will automati-  
cally shut off if you turn the key in the ignition switch to  
the ON/ RUN position, after approximately 30 minutes,  
or if the battery voltage drops.  
At high outside temperatures, the system automatically  
engages the recirculated air mode for approximately 30  
minutes, thereby increasing the cooling capacity perfor-  
mance. Press the recirculation button again to extend the  
recirculated air mode.  
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with an air conditioner  
system that uses R-134a (HFC: hydrofluorocarbon) as a  
refrigerant. Repairs should always be performed by a  
qualified technician, and refrigerant should be collected  
in a recovery system for recycling.  
4
Residual Engine Heat Utilization (REST)  
With the engine switched off, it is possible to  
continue heating the interior for a short while.  
Air volume is controlled automatically. Select a  
temperature for each side of the passenger  
compartment. Set the air distribution control switch to  
the desired position.  
Dust Filter (If Equipped)  
Nearly all dust particles and pollen are filtered out before  
outside air enters the passenger compartment through  
the air distribution system.  
NOTE: Keep the air intake grille in front of windshield  
To select, turn the key in the ignition switch to the ACC  
or the OFF/ LOCK position or remove. Press the recircu-  
lation button. The indicator light in the button illumi-  
nates. This function selection will not activate if the  
battery charge level is insufficient.  
free of snow and debris.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
134 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Operating Tips  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING  
CONTENTS  
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
Park Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143  
Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144  
Neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144  
Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145  
AutoStickGear Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145  
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146  
Program Mode Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 147  
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150  
Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150  
5
If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
Transmission Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
Recommended Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140  
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142  
Maneuvering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
136 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . 152  
Synchronizing ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
ESP Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154  
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 155  
Brake Pad Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158  
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158  
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159  
Tires—General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159  
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159  
Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163  
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163  
Alignment And Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165  
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167  
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167  
Original Equipment Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168  
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168  
Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 169  
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
Gasoline/ Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Sulfur In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Roof Luggage Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING 137  
STARTING PROCEDURES  
WARNING!  
Normal Starting  
Vehicles with automatic transmissions:  
Do not depress the accelerator. Simply turn the key in the  
ignition switch clockwise to the START position and  
release when the engine starts. If the engine will not run,  
turn the key counterclockwise to the OFF/ LOCK posi-  
tion and repeat the starting procedure. If there are several  
unsuccessful attempts, have the system checked at the  
nearest authorized dealer.  
Do not leave animals or children inside parked  
vehicles in hot weather; interior heat build up may  
cause serious injury or death.  
Be sure that the parking brake is engaged and that  
selector lever is in the NEUTRAL or PARK position  
(gearshift lever in Neutral). Turn the key in the ignition  
switch to the ON/ RUN position. Apply the brakes before  
shifting into any driving gear.  
5
Vehicles with manual transmissions:  
Do not depress the accelerator. Fully depress the clutch  
pedal, otherwise the engine cannot be started due to the  
integrated safety interlock. Simply turn the key in the  
ignition switch clockwise to the START position and  
release when the engine starts. The starter will engage  
until the engine is running. If the engine will not run,  
turn the key counterclockwise to the OFF/ LOCK posi-  
tion and repeat the starting procedure. If there are several  
unsuccessful attempts, have the system checked at the  
nearest authorized dealer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
138 STARTING AND OPERATING  
NOTE: Due to the starter non-repeat feature, the key  
must be turned completely to the left before attempting  
to start the engine again.  
If Engine Fails to Start  
CAUTION!  
Do not try to push or tow your vehicle to get it  
started. Your vehicle cannot be started this way.  
Pushing with another vehicle may damage the trans-  
mission or the rear of your vehicle. See Section 6 of  
this manual for proper jump-starting procedures.  
WARNING!  
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the  
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start  
the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire, causing  
serious personal injury.  
Extremely Cold Weather (below -20°F or -29°C)  
For reliable starting in areas where temperatures fre-  
quently drop below -20°F (-29°C), we recommend the use  
of an externally powered battery and an electric engine  
block heater. Advice on these items and installation is  
available at your authorized dealer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 139  
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the  
Normal Starting procedure, it may be flooded. Push the  
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there  
while cranking the engine. This should clear any excess  
fuel in case the engine is flooded.  
After Starting  
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine  
warms up.  
TRANSMISSION SHIFTING  
Manual Transmission  
CAUTION!  
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the  
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to  
15 seconds before trying again.  
5
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not  
have enough power to continue running when the key is  
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accel-  
erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the  
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running  
smoothly.  
NOTE: The parking brake should be engaged and the  
gear selector placed in REVERSE before leaving the  
vehicle, especially on an incline. To place the transmis-  
sion in REVERSE, lift up on the shifter knob, push it to  
the left and pull it back.  
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15-  
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal  
held to the floor, the Normal Starting procedure should  
be repeated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
140 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Fully depress the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As  
you release the clutch pedal, lightly depress the accelera-  
tor pedal.  
NOTE: During cold weather, until the transmission  
lubricant has warmed, you may have difficulty shifting.  
This is normal and not harmful to the transmission.  
Be sure the transmission is in FIRST gear, (not THIRD),  
when starting from a stopped position. Damage to the  
clutch can result from starting in THIRD.  
Recommended Shift Speeds  
To use your manual transmission for both fuel economy  
and performance, it should be upshifted as shown in the  
chart. Shift at the vehicle speeds listed for acceleration.  
NOTE: If there is a need to restart your engine, you  
must recycle your ignition switch to the OFF position  
before restarting the engine.  
Earlier upshifts during cruise conditions (relatively  
steady speeds) will result in increased fuel economy, and  
may be used as indicated.  
For most city driving, you will find it easier to use only  
the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light  
accelerations, sixth gear is recommended.  
Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired  
acceleration rate.  
MANUAL TRANSMISSION  
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or  
try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal  
partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear on the  
clutch.  
RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS  
1-2  
15  
2-3  
25  
3-4  
40  
4-5  
45  
5-6  
50  
MPH  
(km/ h)  
(24)  
(40)  
(64)  
(72)  
(80)  
Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a  
complete stop.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 141  
WARNING!  
CAUTION!  
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key  
from the ignition switch, and lock the vehicle. Do  
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with  
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could move  
the gearshift lever, which could result in an accident  
or serious injury.  
If you skip more than one gear while downshifting  
or downshift at too high an engine speed, you could  
damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.  
Automatic Transmission  
5
WARNING!  
Skipping more than one gear while downshifting  
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. You  
could have an accident.  
The automatic transmission selects individual gears au-  
tomatically, dependent upon:  
Selector lever position  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
142 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Program mode selector switch  
Accelerator position  
Vehicle speed  
WARNING!  
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of PARK  
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle  
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,  
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in  
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit  
someone or something. Only shift into gear when  
the engine is idling normally and when your foot is  
firmly on the brake pedal.  
The gear shifting process is continuously adapted, de-  
pendent on the driving style, the driving situation and  
the road characteristics.  
The selector lever is automatically locked while in the  
PARK position. To move the selector lever out of the  
PARK position, the brake pedal must be firmly depressed  
before the shift lock will release.  
Stopping  
Shift the selector lever to the desired position only when  
the engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is  
applied. Do not release the brake until ready to drive. The  
vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the selec-  
tor lever is in DRIVE or REVERSE position.  
For brief stops, leave the transmission in gear and hold  
the vehicle with the brake pedal. For longer stops with  
the engine idling, shift into the NEUTRAL or PARK  
position and hold the vehicle with the parking brake.  
When stopping the vehicle uphill, do not hold it with the  
accelerator; use the brake. This avoids unnecessary trans-  
mission heat build-up.  
NOTE: After selecting any driving position, wait a  
moment to allow the gear to fully engage before acceler-  
ating, especially when the engine is cold.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 143  
Maneuvering  
NOTE: The key can be removed from the ignition  
switch only with the selector lever in the PARK position.  
With the key removed, the selector lever is locked in the  
PARK position.  
To maneuver in tight areas, control the vehicle speed by  
gradually releasing the brakes. Accelerate gently and  
never abruptly step on the accelerator.  
To rock a vehicle out of soft ground (mud or snow),  
alternately shift from forward to reverse, while applying  
only slight acceleration. Rocking a vehicle free in this  
manner may cause the ABS or traction system malfunc-  
tion indicator light to come on. Turn off the engine and  
restart the engine to clear the malfunction indication.  
5
Park Position  
The PARK position is to be used when parking the  
vehicle. Engage only with the vehicle stopped. The PARK  
position is not intended to serve as a brake when the  
vehicle is parked. Rather, the driver should always use  
the parking brake in addition to placing the selector lever  
in PARK to secure the vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
144 STARTING AND OPERATING  
With a malfunction in the vehicles electrical system, the  
selector lever could remain locked in the PARK position.  
To unlock the selector lever manually, insert the end of  
the multipurpose tool from the glove box (or ball point  
pen) into the covered opening below the position “D” of  
the shift pattern. While pushing the tool down, move the  
selector lever out of the PARK position. After removal of  
the tool from the opening, the cover will not close fully.  
Only after moving the selector lever to the “D+” and  
“D-” positions does the cover return to its closed posi-  
tion.  
Reverse  
Shift into REVERSE gear only when the vehicle is com-  
pletely stopped.  
Dependent on the program mode selector switch position  
“S” or “W,” the maximum speed in the REVERSE gear is  
different. However, it is not possible to change the  
program mode while in REVERSE.  
Neutral  
No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive  
axle. When the brakes are released, the vehicle can be  
moved freely (pushed or towed). Do not engage in  
NEUTRAL position while driving except to coast when  
the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g., on icy roads).  
NOTE: Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other  
reason with selector lever in NEUTRAL can result in  
transmission damage that is not covered by the Limited  
Warranty.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 145  
Drive  
Briefly press the selector lever in the “D+” direction. The  
transmission will shift from the current gear to the next  
higher gear.  
The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth  
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving  
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.  
Press and hold the selector lever in the “D+” direction.  
The transmission will shift from the current gear directly  
to gear “D.”  
AutoStickGear selection  
The transmission gear can be selected by pressing the  
selector lever to the right or the left with the selector lever  
in the DRIVE position. The gear currently selected is  
indicated in the instrument cluster display. Briefly press  
selector lever in the “D-” direction. The transmission will  
shift from the current gear to the next lower gear. Shifting  
into another gear that allows for quicker acceleration or  
to slow the vehicle down is possible. Downshifts can also  
be performed.  
WARNING!  
5
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order  
to obtain braking action. This could result in drive  
wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehi-  
cle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.  
You could lose control of your vehicle and have an  
accident.  
Press and hold the selector lever in the “D-” direction.  
The transmission will shift from the current gear directly  
to the best gear for acceleration.  
NOTE: With transmission in gear “D,” “4,” or “3,”  
upshifting from FIRST to SECOND to THIRD gear may  
be delayed, depending on vehicle speed and engine  
temperature. This allows the catalytic converter to heat  
up more quickly to operating temperatures.  
NOTE: To avoid overrevving the engine when the  
selector lever is moved in “D-” direction, the transmis-  
sion will not shift to a lower gear if the engines revolu-  
tions per minute limit would be exceeded.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
146 STARTING AND OPERATING  
The delayed upshift is effective with vehicle speeds  
below 31 mph (50 km/ h) at partial throttle and engine  
temperatures below 95°F (35°C). To prevent the engine  
from laboring at low RPM when driving uphill or with  
your vehicle heavily loaded, the automatic transmis-  
sion will downshift when necessary to maintain en-  
gine RPM within the best torque range.  
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this  
range.  
“R” REVERSE  
Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a  
complete stop.  
“N” NEUTRAL  
Gear Ranges  
“P” PARK  
The engine may be started in this range. Use this range  
for starting your vehicle if it is moving or being towed.  
NOTE: If the key is in the ON/ RUN position, you must  
press the brake pedal to shift out of the PARK position.  
“D” OVERDRIVE  
This range should be used for most city and highway  
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-  
shifts and best fuel economy.  
PARK supplements the parking brake by locking the  
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.  
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in  
motion.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 147  
Program mode selector switch  
down into a lower gear. Rapid release of the accelerator  
pedal will normally result in an upshift. This gear shift-  
ing process is dependent on the current vehicle speed.  
The transmission is provided with a selector switch for  
Standard “S” and Winter/ Wet “W” (snow and ice) pro-  
gram modes.  
For Winter/ Wet (snow and ice) mode, press the “W”  
symbol on the switch. The vehicle starts out in SECOND  
gear, unless FIRST gear has been selected, or the accel-  
erator pedal is in the kickdown position. The “W” mode  
helps to improve traction and driving stability of the  
vehicle. The gear shifting process occurs at lower vehicle  
and engine speeds than in the “S” program mode.  
5
CAUTION!  
Never change the program mode when the selector  
lever is out of the PARK position. It could result in a  
change of driving characteristics for which you may  
not be prepared.  
For standard mode, press the “S” symbol on the switch.  
Use this mode for all regular driving. The vehicle starts  
out in FIRST gear.  
Depressing the accelerator pedal rapidly or nearly to the  
floor while driving (kickdown position), rather than  
depressing the accelerator pedal in slow, small move-  
ments, will cause the automatic transmission to shift  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
148 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Emergency Operation (Limp Home Mode)  
If vehicle acceleration worsens, or the transmission no  
longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in  
Limp Home Mode which engages when there is a  
malfunction of the transmission.  
Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer  
as soon as possible.  
PARKING BRAKE  
When you apply the parking brake with engine  
running, the brake system warning light in the  
instrument cluster will come on.  
This condition may be accompanied by the CHECK  
ENGINE light in the instrument cluster coming on.  
NOTE: This light, when illuminated with parking brake  
application, shows only that the parking brake is on. It  
does not show the degree of brake application.  
In this mode only the SECOND gear or REVERSE gear  
can be activated.  
To engage SECOND gear or REVERSE:  
1. Stop the vehicle.  
NOTE: If the light remains on with the parking brake  
released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have  
the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer im-  
mediately.  
2. Move the selector lever to the PARK position.  
3. Turn off the engine.  
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking  
brake is fully applied. For manual transmission vehicles,  
place the gear selector in REVERSE. For vehicles  
equipped with automatic transmissions, place the gear  
selector in the PARK position.  
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.  
5. Restart the engine.  
6. Move the selector lever to the DRIVE position (for  
SECOND gear), or move the selector lever to the RE-  
VERSE position (for REVERSE gear).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 149  
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a  
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill  
grade.  
The parking brake should always be applied when the  
driver is not in the vehicle.  
WARNING!  
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before  
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and  
an accident.  
5
To release the parking brake, slightly pull up the handle  
while pushing the lock button, and guide the lever  
downward to its stop. The brake warning light in the  
instrument cluster should go out.  
WARNING!  
Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle. A  
child could be injured, or could injure others, if left  
unattended.  
A warning sounds if you start to drive without having  
released the parking brake.  
When parking on a hill, you must set the parking brake  
before placing the gear selector in PARK. If you dont, the  
load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it  
difficult to move the selector out of PARK. As an added  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
150 STARTING AND OPERATING  
BRAKE SYSTEM  
The BAS complements the antilock brake system (ABS).  
Applying the brakes very quickly results in maximum  
BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system you  
must apply continuous, full braking power during the  
stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure.  
Your vehicle is equipped with power brakes as standard  
equipment. In the event power assist is lost for any  
reason (for example, repeated brake applications with the  
engine off), the brakes will still function. The effort  
required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than  
that required with the power system operating.  
WARNING!  
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal  
capability, the remaining system will still function with  
some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be  
evident by increased pedal travel during application,  
greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and activa-  
tion of the brake warning light during brake use.  
BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from  
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking  
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of  
the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.  
The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those  
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following  
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a  
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-  
dents. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle  
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous  
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or  
the safety of others.  
Brake Assist System (BAS)  
The BAS is designed to maximize the vehicles braking  
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. Maxi-  
mum power boost is applied to the brakes more quickly  
in emergency braking conditions. This can help reduce  
braking distances relative to what ordinary driving and  
braking style might do.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 151  
Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.  
The BAS/ ESP malfunction indicator light in the instru-  
ment cluster comes on with the key in the ignition switch  
turned to the ON/ RUN position and should go out with  
the engine running. If the BAS/ ESP malfunction indica-  
tor light comes on steadily while the engine is running, a  
malfunction has been detected in either the BAS or ESP  
system. As a result, it is possible that only partial engine  
output will be available, and pressing the accelerator  
pedal will require more effort.  
The malfunction indicator light for the BAS is combined  
with the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) malfunction  
indicator light.  
5
If the BAS malfunctions, the brake system functions in  
the usual manner, but without BAS.  
With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS and ESP will be  
disabled. In this condition, both malfunction indicator  
lights come on while the engine is running. If the  
malfunction indicator light stays illuminated, have the  
BAS and ESP checked at your authorized dealer as soon  
as possible.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
152 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)  
WARNING!  
The ESP enhances directional control and reduces wheel-  
spin under various driving conditions. When ESP is  
active, engine torque is limited and the ESP warning light  
starts to flash.  
ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from  
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction  
afforded. The ESP cannot prevent accidents, includ-  
ing those resulting from excessive speed in turns, or  
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful  
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an  
ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a  
reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar-  
dize the user’s safety or the safety of others.  
The ESP warning light starts to flash at any vehicle speed  
as soon as the tires lose traction and the wheels begin to  
spin.  
If the ESP warning light flashes during acceleration, ease  
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as  
possible. While driving, adapt your speed to the prevail-  
ing road conditions.  
In winter operation, the effectiveness of the ESP can be  
enhanced by equipping the vehicle with DaimlerChrysler  
recommended mud and snow (M+S) rated radial-ply  
tires and/ or snow chains.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 153  
Synchronizing ESP  
CAUTION!  
If the power supply was interrupted (battery discon-  
nected or discharged), the BAS/ ESP malfunction indica-  
tor light may be illuminated with the engine running. To  
re-synchronize the ESP, and cancel the malfunction indi-  
cator light, the steering angle sensor will need to be  
recalibrated.  
If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised (see  
the What To Do In Emergencies section in this  
manual), the engine must be shut off (key in the  
ignition switch turned to the OFF/LOCK or ACC  
position). Otherwise, the ESP will immediately be  
engaged and will apply the rear wheel brakes.  
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/ RUN position.  
2. Rotate the steering wheel to the center position.  
5
NOTE: When the ESP warning light is illuminated  
continuously, the ESP is switched off. Adapt your speed  
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.  
3. Rotate the steering wheel completely to the left, and  
then rotate the steering wheel completely to the right.  
4. Bring the steering wheel back to the center position.  
5. The BAS/ ESP malfunction indicator light will go out.  
NOTE: Avoid spinning of one drive wheel. This may  
cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not  
covered by the DaimlerChrysler Limited Warranty.  
If the BAS/ ESP malfunction indicator light is still illumi-  
nated, the vehicle should be serviced at an authorized  
dealer.  
NOTE: If the ESP warning light flashes during accel-  
eration, ease up on the accelerator.  
NOTE: ESP should not be switched off during normal  
driving. Disabling of the system under normal operating  
conditions will eliminate the benefits of the ESP system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
154 STARTING AND OPERATING  
ESP Control switch  
illuminated. With the ESP system switched off, the en-  
gine torque reduction feature is cancelled. Therefore, the  
enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable.  
The ESP control switch is located in the center console.  
When the ESP is switched off, the warning light in the  
instrument cluster comes on. When the ESP is switched  
on, the warning light goes out.  
CAUTION!  
Snow chains should never be used without the  
recommended mud and snow (M+S) rated radial-ply  
tires. Damage to your vehicle may result from such  
usage.  
ESP always operates under braking, even with the switch  
in the OFF position.  
If one drive wheel loses traction and begins to spin, the  
ESP system will apply the brake at the affected wheel  
until the wheel regains sufficient traction. The traction  
control engages at approximately 24 mph (40 km/ h), and  
switches off at 50 mph (80 km/ h).  
To improve the vehicles traction when driving with  
snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or gravel,  
switch off the ESP by pressing the upper half of the ESP  
switch. The ESP warning light will then be continuously  
To return to the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP,  
press the lower half of the switch (the ESP warning light  
goes out).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 155  
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)  
In the case of an emergency brake maneuver, keep  
continuous full pressure on the brake pedal. In this  
manner only can the ABS be most effective.  
The ABS gives increased vehicle stability and brake  
performance under most braking conditions. The system  
automatically “pumps” the brakes during severe braking  
conditions to prevent wheel lock-up. The system operates  
to prevent wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on  
slippery surfaces.  
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will respond even  
with light brake pedal pressure because of the in-  
creased likelihood of locking wheels. The pulsating  
brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road  
conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra  
care while driving.  
NOTE: The ABS improves steering control of the ve-  
hicle during hard braking maneuvers.  
5
The ABS prevents the wheels from locking up above a  
vehicle speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/ h)  
independent of road surface conditions.  
WARNING!  
Significant over- or under-inflation of tires, or mix-  
ing sizes of front or rear tires or wheels on the  
vehicle can reduce braking effectiveness. Maintain  
proper tire pressure and always use the tires and  
wheels specified in this manual for your vehicle.  
At the instant one of the wheels is about to lock up, a  
slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal, indicat-  
ing that the ABS is in the regulating mode.  
Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake pedal  
while experiencing the pulsation. Continuous, steady  
brake pedal pressure results in optimal braking power  
while maintaining the ability to steer the vehicle.  
The anti-lock brake system conducts a low-speed self-test  
at about 12 mph (20 km/ h). If you have your foot lightly  
on the brake while this test is occurring, you may feel  
slight pedal movement. The movement can be more  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
156 STARTING AND OPERATING  
apparent on ice and snow. The anti-lock brake system  
pump motor makes a low humming noise during opera-  
tion, which is normal.  
briefly during this procedure, or remains on after the  
engine is running, have the system checked by an autho-  
rized dealer.  
WARNING!  
Pumping of the brake pedal will diminish the effec-  
tiveness of the anti-lock brakes and may lead to an  
accident. Pumping makes the stopping distance  
longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when  
you need to slow down or stop.  
NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing  
sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard.  
This is normal, indicating that the anti-lock brake system  
is functioning.  
When the ABS malfunction indicator light in the instru-  
ment cluster comes on while the engine is running, it  
indicates that the ABS has detected a malfunction and has  
switched off. In this case, the brake system functions in  
the usual manner, but without antilock assistance. With  
the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS and ESP are also  
switched off. Both malfunction indicator lights come on  
with the engine running. If the charging voltage falls  
The ABS malfunction indicator light in the instrument  
cluster comes on with the key in the ignition switch  
turned to the ON/ RUN position, and should go out with  
the engine running. If the ABS light does not illuminate  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING 157  
below 10 volts, the malfunction indicator light comes on  
and the ABS is switched off. When the voltage is above  
this value again, the malfunction indicator light should  
go out and the ABS is operational. If the malfunction  
indicator light stays illuminated, have the system  
checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible.  
WARNING!  
To use your brakes and accelerator more safely,  
follow these tips:  
Do not “ride” the brakes by resting your foot on  
the pedal. This could overheat the brakes and  
result in unpredictable braking action, longer  
stopping distances, or brake damage.  
When descending mountains or hills, repeated  
braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking  
control. Avoid repeated heavy braking by down-  
shifting the transmission whenever possible.  
Do not drive too fast for road conditions, espe-  
cially when roads are wet or slushy. A wedge of  
water can build up between the tire tread and the  
road. This hydroplaning action can cause loss of  
traction, braking ability, and control.  
WARNING!  
5
ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from  
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or  
steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the con-  
dition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction  
afforded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents, includ-  
ing those resulting from excessive speed in turns,  
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplan-  
ing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can  
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS-  
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-  
less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize  
the user’s safety or the safety of others.  
After going through deep water or a car wash,  
brakes may become wet, resulting in decreased  
performance and unpredictable braking action.  
Dry the brakes by gentle, intermittent pedal ac-  
tion while driving at very slow speeds.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
158 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Brake Pad Break-In  
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power  
steering pump may make noise for a short period of  
time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering  
system. This noise should be considered normal, and  
does not in any way damage the steering system.  
The brakes on your vehicle do not require a long break-in  
period, but avoid repeated hard brake applications from  
high speeds during initial break-in. Also avoid severe  
brake loading such as may be encountered when de-  
scending long mountain grades.  
WARNING!  
POWER STEERING  
The standard power steering system will give you good  
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability  
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical  
steering capability if power assist is lost.  
Continued operation with reduced power steering  
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.  
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.  
If for some reason, the power assist is interrupted, it will  
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-  
tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering  
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during  
parking maneuvers.  
CAUTION!  
Prolong operation of the steering system at the end  
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering  
fluid temperature and should be avoided when  
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may  
occur.  
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering  
wheel travel are considered normal and does not indicate  
that there is a problem with the power steering system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 159  
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION  
1. Safety—  
See general tire safety information included in the “If You  
Need Consumer Assistance” section of this manual.  
WARNING!  
TIRES—GENERAL INFORMATION  
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can  
cause accidents.  
Please take time to read the tire warranty booklet in your  
Owners Manual package. It contains valuable informa-  
tion on tire maintenance.  
Under inflation increases tire flexing and can  
result in tire failure.  
Specific recommendations on guidelines for long—term  
tire storage should be requested of the tire manufacturer.  
Please refer to the tire warranty booklet for contact  
information.  
Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion  
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause  
damage that results in tire failure.  
5
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-  
Tire Pressure  
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.  
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and  
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary  
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:  
Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect  
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in  
loss of vehicle control.  
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle  
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right  
or left.  
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-  
mended cold tire inflation pressure.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
160 STARTING AND OPERATING  
2. Economy—  
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear  
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal  
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for  
earlier tire replacement. Underinflation also increases tire  
rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.  
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—  
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.  
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.  
Tire Inflation Pressures  
The proper cold tire inflation pressure for passenger cars  
is listed on either the face of the drivers door or the  
drivers side “Bpillar.  
Tire Placard Orientation tread act  
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as  
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least  
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to  
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement  
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look  
properly inflated even when they are underinflated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 161  
Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the  
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire  
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),  
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this  
outside temperature condition.  
CAUTION!  
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al-  
ways reinstall the valve stem cap–if equipped. This  
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the  
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.  
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)  
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure  
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.  
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always  
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure  
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not  
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile  
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation  
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-  
sure molded into the tire side wall.  
5
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation  
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds  
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-  
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high  
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very  
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle  
loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera-  
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire  
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading  
and cold tire inflation pressures.  
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range  
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with  
temperature changes.  
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per  
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind  
when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in  
the winter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
162 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in  
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your  
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.  
WARNING!  
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-  
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your  
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a  
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the  
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75  
mph (120 km/h).  
Tire Spinning  
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not  
spin your vehicles wheels above 35 mph (55 km/ h).  
See the paragraph on Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section  
6 of this manual.  
Radial-Ply Tires  
WARNING!  
WARNING!  
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-  
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-  
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure  
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster  
than 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck. And  
don’t let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter  
what the speed.  
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires  
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle  
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-  
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case  
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine  
them with other types of tires.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 163  
Tread Wear Indicators  
Replacement Tires  
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires  
to help you in determining when your tires should be  
replaced.  
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many  
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for  
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-  
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-  
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance  
when replacement is needed (see the paragraph on tread  
wear indicators). Refer to the Tire and Loading Informa-  
tion placard for the size designation of your tire. The  
service description and load identification will be found  
on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent  
replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, han-  
dling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you  
contact your original equipment or an authorized tire  
dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifi-  
cations or capability.  
5
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread  
grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth  
becomes 1/ 16 inch (2 mm). When the indicators appear  
in 2 or more adjacent grooves, the tire should be replaced.  
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this  
point.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
164 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Recommended Tire Inflation Pressures  
WARNING!  
When obtaining replacement tires, assure that the  
tires are specified for replacement on the Cross-  
fire. Tires with the same size, speed, or load  
ratings that are specified for replacement on other  
vehicles may not properly fit on the original  
equipment wheels of your vehicle.  
Sport Performance (Y speed rating) tires and All-Season  
Performance (W speed rating) tires  
Front 225/ 40 ZR18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 psi (221 kPa)  
Rear 255/ 35 ZR19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 psi (227 kPa)  
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than  
that specified for your vehicle. Some combina-  
tions of unapproved tires and wheels may change  
suspension dimensions and performance charac-  
teristics, resulting in changes to steering, han-  
dling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause  
unpredictable handling and stress to steering and  
suspension components. You could lose control  
and have an accident resulting in serious injury or  
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load  
ratings approved for your vehicle.  
Sport Performance (Y speed rating) tires and All-Season  
Performance (W speed rating) tires above 100 mph (161  
km/ h)  
Front 225/ 40 ZR18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 psi (248 kPa)  
Rear 255/ 35 ZR19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 psi (248 kPa)  
Winter tires  
Front 225/ 40 VR18 M+S . . . . . . . . . . . 33 psi (227 kPa)  
Rear 225/ 40 VR18 M+S. . . . . . . . . . . . 36 psi (248 kPa)  
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or  
capacity, other than what was originally equipped  
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load  
index could result in tire overloading and failure.  
You could lose control and have an accident.  
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having  
adequate speed capability can result in sudden  
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING 165  
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.  
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-of-  
balance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and  
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.  
CAUTION!  
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size  
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-  
ings. Check with your authorized dealer before  
replacing tires with a different size.  
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (If  
Equipped)  
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless  
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to  
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each  
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure  
readings to a computer which monitors for low pressure.  
If low pressure is measured, the TPMS Telltale Lamp will  
illuminate.  
Alignment And Balance  
The suspension components of your vehicle should be  
inspected and aligned when needed to obtain full tire  
tread mileage  
5
Poor suspension alignment may result in:  
Fast tire wear.  
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the  
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain  
the proper pressure.  
Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided  
wear.  
Vehicle pull to right or left.  
The TPMS informs you of a low tire pressure condition.  
If this occurs, correct your tire inflation pressure as soon  
as possible, and inspect all of your tires. Be sure to use a  
high quality gauge when adjusting pressure. The TPMS  
is designed to periodically monitor your tire pressure but  
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.  
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer  
for proper diagnosis.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
166 STARTING AND OPERATING  
cannot be expected to function as a tire pressure gauge.  
There can be a delay between the instant you adjust the  
air pressure in a tire and when the system updates the  
display. The TPMS is not intended to provide you with  
notification of rapid air loss.  
CAUTION!  
The TPMS has been optimized for the original  
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have  
been established for the tire size equipped on your  
vehicle. Undesirable operation or sensor damage  
may result when using replacement equipment that  
is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermar-  
ket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use  
aftermarket tire sealant or balance beads as damage  
to the sensors may result. The standard TIREFIT  
system (see Tirefit Tire Repair and Jacking Instruc-  
tions in the What To Do In Emergencies section) is  
specifically designed to operate in conjunction with  
the TPMS, and will not damage the sensors.  
NOTE: The pressure in your tires changes with tem-  
perature. A significant decrease in temperature could  
reduce cold inflation pressure below the TPMS setpoint.  
For example, tires inflated to the proper cold inflation  
pressure on a warm day or in a warm garage could  
illuminate the TPMS Telltale lamp on the following day if  
The TPMS will cause the Telltale lamp in the instrument  
cluster to illuminate whenever the pressure in one tire  
falls 25% below the recommended pressure shown on the  
tire label.  
NOTE: A TPMS does not replace normal tire mainte-  
nance.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING 167  
the temperature is very cold. ALWAYS check the pressure  
TIRE CHAINS  
in your tires if the TPMS Telltale lamp is illuminated.  
The RUD-maticDISC is the only tire chain system  
approved for use on the Chrysler Crossfire.  
General Information  
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and  
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the  
following conditions:  
Chains should only be used on the rear wheels and only  
with the recommended winter mud and snow (M+S)  
tires and wheels. Follow the manufacturers mounting  
instructions.  
This device may not cause harmful interference.  
Tire chains should only be driven on snow-covered roads  
at speeds not to exceed 30 mph (48 km/ h). Remove  
chains as soon as possible when driving on roads without  
snow.  
This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired op-  
eration.  
5
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the  
following licenses:  
When driving with tire chains, press the ESP control  
switch to OFF.  
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123  
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123  
CAUTION!  
Damage to the vehicle may result if unapproved tire  
chains are used.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
168 STARTING AND OPERATING  
ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT TIRES  
SNOW TIRES  
Your vehicle is equipped with either sport performance  
tires or all-season performance tires. The sport perfor-  
mance tires offer the maximum road handling capability  
in dry and wet weather conditions. The all-season per-  
formance tires, while offering slightly less road handling  
capability, are able to provide traction capability in snow  
and ice conditions. Both types of tires are rated for high  
speed operation. It is important that you know what type  
of tires your vehicle is equipped with so that you  
understand their traction and handling characteristics for  
various road conditions. Replacement tires should be of  
the same size and speed rating to continue to provide the  
same level of performance you are accustomed to.  
Some countries or regions require the use of snow tires  
during winter. See the recommended snow type winter  
tire applications in this section.  
WARNING!  
Your vehicle may be equipped with sport perfor-  
mance tires that are optimized for driving in dry and  
wet weather conditions. However, these tires have  
reduced traction capability in snow and ice. When  
driving your Crossfire in these conditions with these  
tires, you must take special care to maintain control  
and avoid accidents. We recommend that you equip  
your vehicle with “SNOW” or “ALL SEASON” tires  
on all four wheels for driving in snowy and icy  
conditions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 169  
If you need snow tires, the recommended size for the  
front and rear tires is the same size as the original  
equipment front tires. This size tire on the rear allows the  
use of tire chains on the rear wheels. Selection of this size  
tire also requires the purchase of two additional wheels  
with the same size specification as the original equip-  
ment front wheels.  
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS  
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at  
different loads and perform different steering, driving,  
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at  
unequal rates, and tend to develop irregular wear pat-  
terns.  
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.  
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with  
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type  
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain  
mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a  
smooth, quiet ride.  
Snow tires may have a lower speed rating than factory  
equipped tires and may not match the maximum vehicle  
speed.  
5
Snow tires should not be operated at sustained speeds  
over 75 mph (120 km/ h).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
170 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your  
type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”  
Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permis-  
sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual  
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-  
formed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING 171  
FUEL REQUIREMENTS  
Your engine is designed to meet all emis-  
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, engine perfor-  
mance, and durability for your vehicle. DaimlerChrysler  
Corporation recommends the use of gasolines that meet  
the WWFC specifications if they are available.  
sions regulations and provide satisfactory  
fuel economy and optimum performance  
when using high quality unleaded gaso-  
line having an octane rating of 91 or  
higher. DaimlerChrysler Corporation re-  
quires the use of 91 octane or higher premium fuel to  
minimize the potential for engine damage.  
Reformulated Gasoline  
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner  
burning fuel, referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.  
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe-  
cially blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve  
air quality.  
5
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to  
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at  
high speeds can cause damage and should be reported to  
your authorized dealer immediately. Engine damage  
resulting from operating with a heavy spark knock may  
not be covered by the new vehicle warranty.  
DaimlerChrysler Corporation supports the use of refor-  
mulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gaso-  
lines will provide excellent performance and durability  
of engine and fuel system components.  
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard  
starting, stalling and stumble. If you experience these  
problems, try another brand of gasoline before consider-  
ing service for the vehicle.  
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends  
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with mate-  
rials called oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE and  
ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the  
country during the winter months to reduce carbon  
monoxide emissions. Fuels blended with these oxygen-  
ates may be used in your vehicle.  
Over 60 automobile manufacturers around the world have  
issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the  
World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define fuel properties  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
172 STARTING AND OPERATING  
the MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the  
pump, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or  
not his/ her gasoline contains MMT.  
CAUTION!  
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol. Use of  
these blends may result in starting and drivability  
problems and may damage critical fuel system com-  
ponents.  
MMT is prohibited in both Federal and California refor-  
mulated gasolines.  
In Canada, MMT can be used at levels higher than those  
allowed in the United States. For this reason, it is even  
more important to look for gasolines without MMT in  
Canada.  
Problems that result from using methanol/ gasoline  
blends are not the responsibility of DaimlerChrysler  
Corporation and may not be covered by the Limited  
Warranty. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from  
Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of Metha-  
nol.  
Materials Added to Fuel  
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to  
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional  
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal  
conditions and would result in unnecessary cost. There-  
fore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.  
MMT in Gasoline  
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is  
blended into some gasolines to increase the octane num-  
ber. Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance  
advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number  
without MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT have shown  
to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system  
performance in some vehicles. DaimlerChrysler Corpo-  
ration recommends using gasolines without MMT. Since  
Sulfur in Gasoline  
If you live in the Northeast United States, your vehicle  
may have been designed to meet California low emission  
standards with cleaner burning California reformulated  
gasoline with low sulfur. If such fuels are not available in  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 173  
states adopting California emission standards, your ve-  
hicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting Federal  
specifications, but emission control system performance  
may be adversely affected.  
ADDING FUEL  
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)  
The gas cap is located under the fuel filler door, on the  
passengers side of the vehicle. To open the door, be sure  
it is unlocked, then gently press the rear edge of the door  
until a click can be heard, then release. The door rear  
edge will spring open enough to grasp and pull it  
completely open. If the central locking system does not  
release the fuel filler door, see your authorized dealer for  
service. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the  
replacement cap has been designed for use with this  
vehicle.  
Gasoline sold outside of California is permitted to have  
higher sulfur levels, which may affect the performance of  
the vehicles catalytic converter. This may cause the  
CHECK ENGINE light to illuminate. DaimlerChrysler  
Corporation recommends that you try a different brand  
of unleaded gasoline having lower sulfur to determine if  
the problem is fuel-related prior to returning your vehicle  
to an authorized dealer for service.  
5
CAUTION!  
CAUTION!  
If the CHECK ENGINE Light is flashing, immediate  
service is required. See the Onboard Diagnostic  
System (OBDII) paragraph in the Maintaining Your  
Vehicle section of this manual.  
Damage to the fuel system or emission control  
system could result from using an improper gas cap.  
A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel  
system. The CHECK ENGINE light will come on if  
the gas cap is not properly secured.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
174 STARTING AND OPERATING  
NOTE: The fuel tank filler tube has a restricting door  
about 2 inches (50 mm) down from the opening. If fuel is  
poured from a portable container, the container should  
have a flexible nozzle long enough to force open the  
restricting door.  
NOTE:  
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel  
tank is full.  
Tighten the gas cap until you hear a single click. This  
is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened.  
The CHECK ENGINE light will come on if the gas cap  
is not properly secured. Make sure that the gas cap is  
tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.  
CAUTION!  
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top  
off” the fuel tank after filling.  
WARNING!  
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near  
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the  
tank is filled.  
With the key in the ignition switch turned to the ON/  
RUN position, the fuel reserve warning light comes on. It  
should go out immediately when the engine is running.  
Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is  
running.  
If the warning light does not go out after starting the  
engine, or if it comes on while driving, it indicates that  
the fuel level is down to the reserve quantity of approxi-  
mately 2 gallons (7.5 liters).  
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a  
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You  
could be burned. Always place gas containers on  
the ground outside the vehicle while filling.  
Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap open can  
cause the CHECK ENGINE light to illuminate.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING 175  
VEHICLE LOADING  
Coupe Vehicles  
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is in the  
following chart and on the tire pressure label attached to  
the driver door pillar.  
External racks do not increase the total load carrying  
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant  
and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the  
roof luggage rack, do not exceed the rated vehicle capac-  
ity. The maximum recommended roof load for your  
vehicle is 110 lbs. (50 kg).  
Vehicle Loading Capacities  
Front Seat Occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2  
Cargo Capacity (with two persons) . . . . 115 lbs (52 kg)  
Rated Vehicle Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 lbs (188 kg)  
5
Roof Luggage Rack  
Convertible Top Vehicles  
CAUTION!  
To prevent damage to the convertible top, DO NOT  
carry any loads on the convertible top.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
176 STARTING AND OPERATING  
WARNING!  
CAUTION!  
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your  
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the  
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in  
personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof  
luggage rack “Cautions” when carrying cargo on  
your roof rack.  
To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO  
NOT carry any loads on the roof luggage rack  
which may come in contact with the roof panel.  
The load should be secured and placed on top of  
the rack, not directly on the roof. If it is necessary  
to place some part of the load on the roof, place a  
blanket or some other protection between the load  
and the roof surface.  
To avoid damage to the roof luggage rack and  
vehicle, do not exceed the rated load capacity of  
your roof luggage rack system maximum load  
capacity. Always distribute heavy loads as evenly  
as possible and secure the load appropriately.  
TRAILER TOWING  
Trailer towing with your Crossfire is not recommended.  
Long loads which extend over the windshield,  
such as wood panels or surfboards, should be  
carefully secured to both the front and rear of the  
vehicle.  
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care-  
fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the  
roof luggage rack. Wind forces, due to natural  
causes or nearby truck traffic, can add sudden  
upward loads. This is especially true on large flat  
loads and may result in damage to the cargo or  
your vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
CONTENTS  
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
TIREFIT Tire Repair And Jacking . . . . . . . . . . 180  
TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180  
Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183  
Jack Location And Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 184  
Jump-Starting The Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187  
Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190  
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190  
Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191  
Towing Eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192  
Tow-Away Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194  
Relieving Hydraulic Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196  
Opening a Locked Decklid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
178 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER  
NOTE: With extended use, the flasher may run down  
The flasher switch is located in the console. Push in  
the flasher switch and all front and rear directional  
signals will flash. Press the flasher switch a second  
time to turn the flashers off.  
your battery.  
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS  
During severe operating conditions and stop-and-go city  
traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to the red  
area on the gauge.  
The engine should not be operated with the coolant  
temperature in the red area. Doing so may cause serious  
damage which is not covered by the DaimlerChrysler  
Limited Warranty.  
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the  
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-  
tion.  
On the highways – Slow down and use the highest  
gear possible.  
Do not use this emergency warning system when the  
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled  
and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.  
In city traffic – While stopped, put the transmission in  
Neutral, but do not increase engine idle speed.  
In city traffic – While moving, shift into the highest  
gear possible to reduce engine RPM.  
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the  
flasher system will continue to operate with the ignition  
key removed and the vehicle locked.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 179  
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down  
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner  
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to  
the cooling system and turning off the A/ C removes this  
heat. You can also turn the temperature control to maxi-  
mum heat, the mode control to floor, and the fan control  
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement  
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the  
cooling system.  
WARNING!  
A hot cooling system is dangerous. You or others  
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant.  
If your temperature gauge pointer is in the red area,  
turn off the engine immediately. You may want to  
call an authorized dealer for service. If you decide to  
look under the hood yourself, see Section 7 of this  
manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling  
System Pressure Cap paragraph.  
CAUTION!  
6
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage  
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H,” pull  
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the  
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops  
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on  
the “H,” turn the engine off immediately, and call for  
service.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
180 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
TIREFIT TIRE REPAIR AND JACKING  
1. TIREFIT sealant bottle  
2. Air pump flap  
TIREFIT  
Small punctures, particularly those in the tread, can be  
sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or  
nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can  
be used in outside temperatures down to approximately  
-4°F (-20°C).  
3. Recess in air pump  
4. Power plug and cable  
5. Air pump hose with pressure gauge  
6. Hose connection on sealant bottle  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 181  
Sealing tire with TIREFIT  
WARNING!  
1. Set the parking brake and turn on the hazard warning  
flashers.  
Cuts or punctures larger than approximately 0.16 in. (4  
mm), tire damage caused by driving with extremely  
low tire pressure or on a flat tire, or a damaged wheel  
can pose a hazard while driving. TIREFIT should not  
be used in such circumstances. Do not drive the  
vehicle under such circumstances. Contact your near-  
est authorized dealer for assistance.  
2. Move the transmission selector lever to the PARK  
position (manual transmission to FIRST or REVERSE  
gear) and turn off the engine.  
3. Remove the TIREFIT kit and electric air pump from  
the area below the cargo compartment carpet.  
4. Open flap (2) on the electric air pump.  
Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to come  
in contact with hair, eyes or clothing. TIREFIT is  
harmful if inhaled, swallowed or absorbed through the  
skin: It causes skin, eye and respiratory irritation. Any  
contact with eyes or skin should be flushed immedi-  
ately with plenty of water. If clothing comes in contact  
with TIREFIT, change clothing as soon as possible.  
5. Pull the power plug (4) and air hose (5) along with the  
pressure gauge out of the air pump housing.  
6
6. Screw the air hose (5) onto the hose connection on the  
TIREFIT sealant bottle (1).  
7. Holding the sealant bottle by the top, insert it down-  
wards into the recess (3) on the air pump.  
In case of allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician  
immediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children. If  
swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of  
water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce  
vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.  
8. Unscrew the valve cap from the valve on the deflated  
tire.  
9. Screw the filler hose from the sealant bottle on the tire  
valve.  
Keep away from open flame or heat source.  
10. Insert the power plug (4) into the power point on the  
instrument panel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
182 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
11. Turn the ignition key to the ON/ RUN position.  
18. Check the pressure in the tire. If the pressure is above  
19 psi (130 kPa), inflate the tire to the pressure indicated  
on the tire pressure label on the driver side latch pillar.  
12. Press the switch on the air pump to 1. The air pump  
should start to inflate the tire.  
19. Have the tire inspected at the earliest opportunity at  
an authorized dealer or tire service center.  
13. After five minutes, the tire should be inflated to at  
least 26 psi (180 kPa) on the pressure gauge.  
NOTE: Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/ h) until the tire  
has been inspected.  
14. If the tire doesnt inflate to this level, press the air  
pump switch to 0, disconnect the TIREFIT system from  
the tire, and drive the vehicle back and forth approxi-  
mately 30 feet (9 m) to distribute the sealant more evenly  
within the tire.  
NOTE: If a pressure of at least 19 psi (130 kPa) cannot  
be maintained in the tire, the tire is too badly damaged.  
Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further, and call for  
assistance.  
15. Attach the air pump hose directly to the tire, press the  
switch to 1, and inflate the tire again. NOTE: If a tire  
pressure of 26 psi (180 kPa) is not reached after five  
minutes, the tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to  
drive the vehicle further, and call for assistance.  
NOTE: Do not operate the electric air pump for more  
than eight minutes to avoid overheating. The air pump  
may be used again once it has cooled down.  
NOTE: Replace the TIREFIT sealant bottle once every  
16. If a tire pressure of 26 psi (180 kPa) is obtained, press  
the air pump switch to 0, turn the ignition switch to the  
OFF/ LOCK position, and disconnect the TIREFIT system.  
four years to assure optimum operation of the system.  
NOTE: If TIREFIT is liquid, clean water and a damp  
cloth will remove the material from the vehicle or tire and  
wheel components. Once TIREFIT sealing material has  
dried, it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded.  
17. Drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes to ensure  
optimum distribution of the tire sealant within the tire.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 183  
Preparations for Jacking  
WARNING!  
replaced. (See TIREFIT Tire Repair section for a descrip-  
tion of cuts and punctures that may be repairable with  
TIREFIT.)  
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The  
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You  
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body  
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run  
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you need  
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service  
facility where it can be raised on a lift.  
6
WARNING!  
Turn on the hazard warning flashers and park the  
vehicle on a firm, level surface; avoid ice or slippery  
areas.  
Do not attempt to repair a tire on the side of the  
vehicle close to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to  
avoid the danger of being hit when operating the  
jack or repairing a tire.  
Firmly set the parking brake and shift the transmission  
selector lever into PARK (manual transmission to  
FIRST or REVERSE gear).  
Jacking the vehicle should only be necessary in the event  
that a tire has been severely damaged, and must be  
Turn off the engine.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
184 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire.  
Jack Location and Instructions  
1. Remove the jack and jack handle from stowage be-  
neath the cargo compartment carpet.  
Passengers must not remain in the vehicle when the  
vehicle is jacked.  
NOTE: The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up  
the vehicle at the specified jack location points built  
beneath either side of the vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 185  
2. The lifting points for the jack are located beneath the  
outer edge of the body side, directly behind the front  
wheel housings, and in front of the rear wheel housings.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
186 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
NOTE: Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the  
4. Replace the tire.  
jack is securely engaged, as shown.  
5. Lower the vehicle by cranking the handle counter-  
clockwise, then remove the jack assembly.  
NOTE: Before storing the jack, it should be fully  
collapsed.  
6. Ensure proper tire pressure.  
WARNING!  
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make  
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and  
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough  
to make the necessary repair.  
3. Holding the jack, insert the cradle under the lifting  
points. Crank the handle clockwise until the jack base  
meets the ground. Place the jack on firm ground. Position  
the jack so that it is always level, even if the vehicle is  
parked on an incline. Raise the vehicle only until the tire  
just clears the surface. Minimum tire lift provides maxi-  
mum stability.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 187  
WARNING!  
CAUTION!  
A loose jack or tool thrown forward in a collision or  
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-  
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and tools in the  
places provided.  
Do not try to push or tow your vehicle to get it  
started. Your vehicle cannot be started this way.  
Pushing with another vehicle may damage the trans-  
mission or the rear of your vehicle. If your vehicle  
has a discharged (dead) battery, booster cables may  
be used to obtain a start from another vehicle. This  
type of start can be dangerous if done improperly, so  
follow the procedure carefully.  
JUMP-STARTING THE BATTERY  
WARNING!  
6
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever  
the hood is raised. It can start any time the ignition  
switch is on. You can be hurt by the fan.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
188 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
WARNING!  
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not  
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing.  
Don’t lean over battery when attaching clamps or  
allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes  
in eyes or on skin, flush contaminated area immedi-  
ately with large quantities of water.  
A battery generates hydrogen gas that is flammable  
and explosive. Keep flame or spark away from the  
vent holes. Do not use a booster battery or any other  
booster source with an output that exceeds 12 volts.  
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry  
such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an  
inadvertent electrical contact.  
2. When boost is provided by a battery in another  
vehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable reach but  
without letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake,  
place the transmission in Neutral and turn the ignition  
OFF for both vehicles.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 189  
3. Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical  
loads.  
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster  
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the  
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.  
7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above  
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fans.  
NOTE: If engine does not run after several unsuccessful  
starting attempts, have it checked at the nearest autho-  
rized dealer.  
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES  
6
WARNING!  
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is danger-  
ous. You could lose control of the vehicle and possi-  
bly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and carefully  
whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,  
snow, rain, mud, loose sand, etc.).  
4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive  
jump-start attachment of the booster battery. Connect the  
other end of the same cable to the positive jump-start  
attachment of the discharged battery.  
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative jump-  
start attachment of the booster battery and then to the  
engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Make  
sure you have good contact on the engine.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
190 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
Traction  
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE  
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a  
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road  
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or  
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To  
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should  
be observed:  
In order to free a stuck vehicle you must turn off the  
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) before attempting to  
“rock” the vehicle.  
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it  
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your  
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the  
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between Reverse  
and Drive. Usually the least accelerator pedal pressure to  
maintain the rocking motion without spinning the  
wheels is most effective.  
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are  
slushy.  
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.  
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become  
visible.  
NOTE: ESP should be turned on again after freeing the  
vehicle from a stuck condition.  
4. Keep tires properly inflated.  
5. Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and  
the vehicle in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.  
CAUTION!  
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast  
may lead to transmission/axle overheating and fail-  
ure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the  
wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 191  
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE  
CAUTION!  
We recommend that the vehicle be transported using flat  
bed equipment. This method is preferable to other types  
of towing.  
If the vehicle is towed with the front wheels raised,  
the engine must be shut off (key in the ignition  
switch turned to the OFF/LOCK or ACC positions).  
Otherwise, the ESP will immediately be engaged  
and will apply the rear wheel brakes. Switch off the  
tow-away alarm as well as the automatic central  
locking system.  
CAUTION!  
Important! If towing the vehicle, please note the  
following: With the automatic central locking acti-  
vated and the key in the ignition switch turned to the  
ON/RUN position, the vehicle doors lock if the left  
front wheel and the right rear wheel are turning at  
vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or  
more. To prevent the vehicle door locks from lock-  
ing, deactivate the automatic central locking.  
Towing restrictions for vehicles with automatic transmis-  
sion: The vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the  
ground and the transmission selector lever in the Neutral  
position for distances up to 30 miles (48 km) and at a  
speed not to exceed 30 mph (48 km/ h). The key must be  
turned to the ON/ RUN position in the ignition. To be  
certain to avoid a possibility of damage to the transmis-  
sion, however, we recommend the drive shaft be discon-  
nected at the rear axle drive flange for any towing  
beyond a short tow to a nearby garage.  
6
Always comply with applicable state or local towing  
ordinances.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
192 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
located behind the lower grille in the fascia. For access, a  
snap-in grille must be removed using the multifunction  
tool from the glovebox.  
CAUTION!  
Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front  
with sling-type towing equipment. Damage to the  
front fascia will result.  
Always use wheel lift equipment when towing  
from the front. The only other approved method  
of towing is with a flatbed truck.  
Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to  
the rear sheet metal and fascia will occur.  
Do not push or tow this vehicle with another  
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans-  
mission may result.  
Towing Eyes  
The vehicle is equipped with front and rear towing eyes  
to allow towing with the wheels on the ground or to  
allow the vehicle to be easily drawn up on a flatbed tow  
truck. The rear towing eye is located on the right side of  
the vehicle below the rear fascia. The front hook is  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 193  
Insert the tool (or similar sized screwdriver) into the slot  
in the grille as shown (the tool must be inserted far  
enough to engage the clip on the left side of the grille).  
Push the tool to the left to disengage the clip and detach  
the grille. The front towing eye is now accessible.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
194 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
Tow-Away Alarm  
To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm feature, press  
the tow-away alarm switch to turn off the tow-away  
alarm before towing the vehicle, or when parking on a  
surface subject to movement, such as a ferry or auto train.  
To do so, turn the key in the ignition switch to the  
OFF/ LOCK or ACC positions, or remove key from the  
ignition switch. Press the upper half of the tow-away  
alarm switch. The indicator light will illuminate briefly.  
Then, exit the vehicle and lock with a key or the remote  
control. The tow-away alarm remains switched off until  
the vehicle is locked again with a key or the remote  
control, at which time it is automatically reactivated.  
Once the alarm system has been armed, the exterior  
vehicle lights will flash and an alarm will sound when  
anyone attempts to raise the vehicle for towing. The  
alarm will last approximately three minutes in the form  
of flashing exterior lights. At the same time, an alarm will  
sound for 30 seconds. The alarm will stay on even if the  
vehicle is immediately lowered. To cancel the alarm,  
insert the key in the ignition switch or press the transmit  
button on the key fob.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 195  
CONVERTIBLE TOP EMERGENCY OPERATION  
If the convertible top cannot be closed using the convert-  
ible top switch, check the following:  
Is the decklid closed properly?  
Is there sufficient battery voltage? Start the engine if  
necessary.  
Is the rear cargo compartment divider secured in the  
vertical position?  
If the power convertible top operation does not function  
properly, you can close the convertible top manually.  
6
CAUTION!  
NOTE: The multifunction tool from the glovebox is  
required for this job.  
Manually closing the convertible top is a compli-  
cated and technically demanding procedure. Closing  
the convertible top manually should be performed  
with great care by two people. Close the convertible  
top manually in emergency cases only. Otherwise,  
visit an authorized DaimlerChrysler Dealer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
196 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
Relieving Hydraulic Pressure  
CAUTION!  
NOTE: The hydraulic pressure must be relieved before  
Ensure that the decklid is closed while raising the  
convertible top manually to prevent the possibility  
of contact between the decklid and the tonneau  
cover.  
the top can manually be raised or lowered.  
1. Turn the ignition to the “ON” position.  
2. Push down on the convertible top switch and hold in  
that position.  
3. Turn the ignition “OFF” and continue to push down  
on the switch for 5 seconds.  
WARNING!  
Do not place your hands near the convertible top  
frame, upper windshield area, or the convertible top  
storage compartment while the convertible top is  
being raised and locked. Serious personal injury  
may occur.  
4. After 5 seconds the hydraulic system pressure will be  
relieved.  
WARNING!  
It is important that a second person assist you to  
close the convertible top manually to prevent inju-  
ries.  
1. Lower the windows and open the doors.  
2. Turn the ignition key off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 197  
3. Unlock the storage compartment by placing the tool  
on the bolt between the backrest and the tonneau cover.  
Turn the wrench in the direction of the arrow to its stop  
and remove the tool.  
5. Pull up hard on the upper section of the convertible  
top to move it out of its storage compartment.  
6
NOTE: Do not let go of the convertible top as it may fall  
back into the convertible top storage compartment.  
4. Open the tonneau cover and secure it in the upright  
position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
198 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
6. Move the convertible top toward the windshield  
header.  
8. Place the rear window section of the convertible top in  
its vertical position.  
9. Close the tonneau cover by placing hands near the  
edges (arrows) and slowly lowering it. The tonneau cover  
must lock in the first notch of the compartment cover  
catch.  
WARNING!  
Do not place your hands in the convertible top frame  
areas. Serious personal injury may occur.  
7. Do not place the convertible top frame onto wind-  
shield header.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 199  
10. Lock the convertible top storage compartment by  
placing the tool on the bolt between the backrest and the  
tonneau cover. Turn the wrench in the direction of the  
arrow to its stop and remove the tool.  
11. Lower the rear window section of the convertible top  
down and lock into the tonneau cover.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
200 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
12. Fold down the locking latch handle.  
13. Turn the latch handle just past one quarter turn  
clockwise and pull the convertible top frame carefully  
down until it meets the windshield header attachment  
points.  
15. Fold the latch handle up.  
The convertible top is now locked onto the windshield  
header.  
NOTE: Have the convertible top operation checked at  
your authorized DaimlerChrysler Dealer as soon as pos-  
sible.  
14. Turn the latch handle counterclockwise to the stop in  
order to lock the convertible top.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 201  
Opening a Locked Decklid  
It is possible for the decklid to become locked if a  
convertible top system malfunction occurs. If the top is  
manually moved to the full up or full down position  
when the hydraulic pressure is relieved, the decklid  
should unlock.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
CONTENTS  
3.2L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205  
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) . . . . . . . 206  
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217  
Chassis Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218  
Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218  
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219  
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . 219  
Windshield Washer Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220  
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221  
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222  
Hoses And Vacuum/ Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . 225  
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225  
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228  
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207  
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208  
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208  
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209  
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209  
Ignition Wiring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215  
Crankcase Emission Control System . . . . . . . . 215  
Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215  
Air Conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
204 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229  
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244  
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230  
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245  
Convertible Top Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234  
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235  
General Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235  
Weather Strip Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236  
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237  
Relay Control Module Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241  
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242  
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243  
Interior Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243  
Exterior Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243  
Exterior Light Bulb Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244  
Front And Rear Sidemarker Lights . . . . . . . . . 245  
License Plate Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246  
Headlight Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246  
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249  
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251  
Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252  
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252  
Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253  
Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 205  
3.2L ENGINE  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
206 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)  
CAUTION!  
To meet new government regulations and promote  
cleaner air, your Crossfire is equipped with a sophisti-  
cated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This  
system monitors the performance of the emissions and  
engine control systems. When these systems are operat-  
ing properly, your vehicle will provide excellent perfor-  
mance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions  
well within current government regulations.  
Prolonged driving with the CHECK ENGINE light  
on could cause further damage to the emission  
control system. It could also affect fuel economy and  
drivability. The vehicle must be serviced before any  
state emissions tests can be performed.  
If the CHECK ENGINE light is flashing, severe catalytic  
converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Im-  
mediate service is required.  
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system  
will turn on the CHECK ENGINE Light. It will also store  
diagnostic codes and other information to assist your  
service technician in making repairs. Although your  
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see  
your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.  
If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the CHECK  
ENGINE light may come on. Be sure the gas cap is  
tightened every time you add fuel. Tighten the cap until  
you hear it “click” once.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 207  
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
PROGRAMS  
2. Turn the ignition to the ON/ RUN position, but do not  
crank or start the engine.  
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass  
an inspection of your vehicles emissions control system.  
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.  
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start  
this test over.  
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON/ RUN  
position, you will see your CHECK ENGINE light come  
on as part of a normal bulb check.  
For states which have an I/ M (Inspection and  
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies  
the following: the CHECK ENGINE Light is functioning  
and is not on when the engine is running, and that the  
OBD (Onboard Diagnostic) system is ready for testing.  
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will  
happen:  
Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD  
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently  
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery  
replacement. If the OBD system should be determined  
not ready for the I/ M test, your vehicle may fail the test.  
a. The CHECK ENGINE light will flash for about 10  
seconds and then return to being fully illuminated  
until you turn off the ignition key or start the  
engine. This means that your vehicles OBD system  
is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/ M  
station.  
7
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test  
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To  
check if your vehicles OBD system is ready, you must do  
the following:  
b. The CHECK ENGINE light will not flash at all  
and will remain fully illuminated until you turn off  
the ignition key or start the engine. This means that  
your vehicles OBD system is ready and you can  
proceed to the I/ M station.  
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
208 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your  
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was  
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,  
you may need to do nothing more than drive your  
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD  
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine  
may then indicate that the system is now ready.  
REPLACEMENT PARTS  
Use of genuine Moparparts for normal/ scheduled  
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in-  
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures  
caused by the use of non-Moparparts for maintenance  
and repairs will not be covered by the warranty offered  
by DaimlerChrysler Corporation.  
Regardless of whether your vehicles OBD system is  
ready or not ready, if the CHECK ENGINE light is  
illuminated during normal vehicle operation, you should  
have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/ M  
station. The I/ M station can fail your vehicle because the  
CHECK ENGINE light is on with the engine running.  
DEALER SERVICE  
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special  
tools and equipment to perform all service operations in  
an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which  
include detailed service information for your Crossfire.  
Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure  
yourself.  
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control  
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed  
against you.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 209  
Engine Oil  
WARNING!  
Checking Oil Level  
You can be badly injured working on or around a  
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which  
you have the knowledge and the proper equipment.  
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform  
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent  
technician.  
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must  
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at  
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.  
You can check the oil level using the procedure described  
in Checking Engine Oil Level in the Understanding Your  
Instrument Panel section, or by checking the engine oil  
dipstick.  
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
The pages that follow contain the maintenance service  
recommended by the engineers who designed your ve-  
hicle.  
7
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed  
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should  
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.  
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it  
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.  
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is  
observed or suspected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
210 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5  
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off, or before  
starting the engine after it has sat overnight.  
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will  
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain  
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the  
dipstick. Adding 1 quart of oil when the reading is at the  
MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on this engine.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 211  
Change Engine Oil  
The oil change interval for your Crossfire is initially set at  
7,000 miles (Canada: 11,000 km).  
Extensive engine idling  
Driving in dusty conditions  
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km)  
The Flexible Service System (FSS) in your vehicle evalu-  
ates engine temperature, oil level, vehicle speed, engine  
speed, distance driven, and the time elapsed since your  
last service. It determines when your vehicle needs  
maintenance service and alerts you in advance. The next  
necessary service is indicated by the FSS in your instru-  
ment cluster.  
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high  
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C)  
Taxi, Police, or delivery service (commercial service)  
Observe the oil change interval indicated by your FSS  
system. This system will monitor the driving conditions  
seen by your vehicle, and will recommend the best  
interval for servicing your vehicle to maintain it in top  
condition.  
NOTE: Also see the FSS system details in the Under-  
standing Your Instrument Panel section of this manual.  
7
Very light duty driving cycles (most trips more than 10  
miles [16 km] at moderate speeds in moderate tempera-  
ture conditions) can extend the service interval beyond  
7,000 miles (Canada: 11,000 km).  
CAUTION!  
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause  
oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could dam-  
age your engine.  
If ANY of the following apply to your driving, the oil  
change interval can be reduced significantly:  
Day and night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C)  
Stop-and-go driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
212 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Engine Oil Selection  
Materials Added To Engine Oils  
For best performance and maximum protection under all  
types of operating conditions, only use synthetic engine  
oils, approved to MB 229.3 or MB 229.5, such as Mobil 1  
SAE 0W-40. The FSS may not alert for an oil change at the  
proper interval if an unapproved engine oil is used;  
engine damage and reduced engine life may result.  
Do not add materials (other than leak detection dyes) to  
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its  
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-  
tives.  
Disposing of Used Engine Oil  
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil from  
your vehicle. Used oil, indiscriminately discarded, can  
present a problem to the environment. Contact your  
dealer, service station, or governmental agency for advice  
on how and where used oil can be safely discarded in  
your area.  
Engine Oil Filter  
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine  
oil change.  
Engine Oil Filter Selection  
All DaimlerChrysler Corporation engines have a full-  
flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for  
replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies  
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to  
assure most efficient service. MoparEngine Oil Filters  
are high quality oil filters and are recommended.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 213  
Drive Belts - Check Condition and Tension  
Engine Air Cleaner Filter  
At the distance shown in the maintenance schedules,  
check all drive belts for condition and proper tension.  
Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure.  
Under normal driving conditions, replace the air filter at  
each interval called out by FSS.  
WARNING!  
Inspect the drive belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, or  
glazing and replace them if there is any sign of damage  
which could result in belt failure. If adjustment is re-  
quired, adjust the belts according to the specifications  
and procedures shown in the Service Manual.  
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection  
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air  
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or  
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the  
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with  
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in  
serious personal injury.  
Special tools are required to properly measure tension  
and to restore belt tension to factory specifications. Also,  
check belt routing to make sure there is no interference  
between the belts and other engine components.  
7
Spark Plugs  
Engine Fuel Filter  
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor-  
mance and emission control. New plugs should be in-  
stalled at the distance specified in the appropriate main-  
tenance chart. The entire set should be replaced if there is  
any malfunction due to a faulty spark plug. Check the  
specifications section for the proper type of spark plug  
for use in your vehicle.  
A plugged fuel filter can cause hard starting or limit the  
speed at which a vehicle can be driven. Should an  
excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank,  
frequent filter replacement may be necessary. See your  
authorized dealer for service.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
214 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Catalytic Converter  
WARNING!  
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel  
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the  
catalyst as an emission control device.  
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over  
materials that can burn. Such materials might be  
grass or leaves coming into contact with your ex-  
haust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in  
areas where your exhaust system can contact any-  
thing that can burn.  
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter  
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to  
keep the engine properly serviced to assure proper catalyst  
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.  
If the CHECK ENGINE light is flashing, immediate  
service is required.  
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning  
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe  
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop  
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.  
Service, including a tune up to DaimlerChrysler Corpo-  
rations specifications, should be obtained immediately.  
CAUTION!  
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your  
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the  
event of engine malfunction, particularly involving  
engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance,  
have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued opera-  
tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could  
cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible  
damage to the converter and the vehicle.  
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:  
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition  
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in  
motion.  
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the  
vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 215  
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires  
disconnected for a prolonged period.  
WARNING!  
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories con-  
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after  
handling.  
Ignition Wiring System  
The ignition cables should be kept clean and properly  
connected. Terminals should be fully seated. Cracked,  
damaged, or faulty cables should be replaced.  
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can  
burn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid to  
contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean over a  
battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in  
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with  
large amounts of water.  
Crankcase Emission Control System  
Proper operation of this system depends on freedom  
from sticking or plugging due to deposits.  
Check ventilation hose for indication of damage or  
plugging deposits. Replace if necessary.  
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame  
or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use a booster  
battery or any other booster source with an output  
greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable clamps to  
touch each other.  
7
Maintenance-Free Battery  
The top of the maintenance-free battery is permanently  
sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic  
maintenance required.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
216 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and  
through the condenser as required. Fabric front fascia  
protectors may reduce air flow to the condenser, reducing  
air conditioning performance.  
CAUTION!  
It is essential when replacing the cables on the  
battery that the positive cable is attached to the  
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the  
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)  
and negative (-) and identified on the battery case.  
Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts  
and free of corrosion. Apply grease to posts and  
clamps after tightening.  
WARNING!  
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant  
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury  
or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any  
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be  
done by an experienced repair person.  
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the  
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-  
fore connecting the charger to battery. Do not use a  
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage as battery  
damage can result.  
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling  
The air conditioning system of your vehicle contains  
R-134a, a refrigerant that does not deplete the ozone layer  
in the upper atmosphere. The DaimlerChrysler Corpora-  
tion recommends that air conditioning service be done by  
facilities using refrigerant recycling and recovery equip-  
ment that meets SAE standard J1991.  
Air Conditioner  
Check the air conditioning system at the start of the  
warm weather season.  
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems  
lower than expected, check the front of the A/ C con-  
denser for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 217  
Power Steering Fluid  
Before removing the reservoir cap, wipe the outside of  
the cap and reservoir so that no dirt can fall into the  
reservoir.  
No power steering fluid service is required. The system is  
filled at the factory with Pentosin CHF 11S. Steering noise  
and reduced component life may result if an unapproved  
fluid is used.  
The power steering pump has a dipstick. Fluid level  
should be maintained at the proper level indicated on the  
dipstick. If the indicated level of power steering fluid is  
low, see your authorized dealer. With a clean cloth, wipe  
any spilled fluid from all surfaces.  
7
During scheduled maintenance, check the power steering  
fluid level at the power steering fluid reservoir. Nor-  
mally, it will not be necessary to add power steering  
fluid.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
218 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Chassis Lubrication  
Body Lubrication  
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as  
seat tracks, doors, and rear liftgate / decklid hinges,  
should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy  
operation and to protect against rust and wear.  
Front Suspension Ball Joints  
There are two front suspension lower ball joints that are  
permanently lubricated. Inspect these ball joints when-  
ever under-vehicle service is done.  
Hood Latch  
Steering Linkage  
When performing other under hood services, the hood  
latch release mechanism and safety catch should be  
inspected, cleaned, and lubricated.  
Inspect tie rod ends whenever the vehicle is serviced.  
They are permanently lubricated and do not require  
periodic lubrication.  
It is important to maintain proper lubrication to insure  
that the hood mechanisms work properly and safely.  
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, NLGI Grade 2, should be ap-  
plied sparingly to all pivot and sliding contact areas.  
Drive Shaft Universal Joints  
Your vehicle has four constant velocity universal joints.  
Periodic lubrication of these joints is not required. How-  
ever, the joint boots should be inspected for external  
leakage or damage when other maintenance is per-  
formed.  
Driver’s Door Lock Cylinder  
The drivers door lock cylinder should be lubricated  
twice a year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a  
small amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar௡  
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder  
(avoid excess lubricant).  
If leakage or damage is evident, replace the universal  
joint boot and grease immediately.  
Continued operation could result in failure of the univer-  
sal joint due to water and dirt contamination of the  
grease. This would require complete replacement of the  
joint assembly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 219  
Insert the key into the lock cylinder and rotate from the  
unlocked to the locked position without adding more  
lubricant. Repeat this procedure three or four times. Wipe  
all the lubricant off the key with a clean cloth, to avoid  
soiling clothing.  
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement  
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the glass.  
2. Rotate the blade 45 degrees to gain access to the  
release tab.  
Windshield Wiper Blades  
3. Push the release tab as shown in the illustration and  
slide the wiper blade assembly down along the arm.  
Gently place the wiper arm on the windshield.  
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the  
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a  
mild non-abrasive cleaner, or use the washer solvent.  
This will remove accumulations of salt or road film and  
help reduce streaking, chatter, and smearing.  
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods  
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use  
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt  
from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to  
remove frost or ice from the windshield. Make sure that  
they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to  
avoid damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out of  
contact with petroleum products such as engine oil,  
gasoline, etc.  
7
4. Install the new blade assembly onto the wiper arm tip  
until it locks in place.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
220 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Windshield Washer Reservoir  
WARNING!  
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine  
compartment and should be checked for fluid level at  
regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield  
washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) rated not to  
freeze at -25°F (-31°C). Operate the system for a few  
seconds to flush out the residual water.  
Do not overfill the washer reservoir. Do not attempt  
to fill to the top of the filler neck. Fluid may leak out  
onto the floor or driveway causing a potential slip  
and fall hazard. When the indicator light first illu-  
minates, the maximum fill amount is 1 gallon or 4  
liters.  
WARNING!  
Commercially available windshield washer solvents  
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care  
must be exercised when filling or working around  
the washer solution.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 221  
Exhaust System  
WARNING!  
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into  
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust  
system.  
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon  
monoxide which is colorless and odorless. Breathing  
it can make you unconscious and can eventually  
poison you. Follow the above precautions to keep  
your exhaust system as safe as possible.  
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system,  
or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or  
when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,  
have a competent technician inspect the complete ex-  
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-  
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams  
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep  
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the  
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-  
cation or oil change. Replace as required.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
222 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Cooling System  
Check the front of the radiator and condenser for an  
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. Clean the radiator and  
condenser by gently spraying water from a garden hose  
at the back of the radiator core.  
WARNING!  
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-  
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition  
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature  
controlled and can start at any time the ignition  
key is in the ON position.  
Check the recovery bottle tank tubing for condition and  
tightness of connection at the bottle and radiator. Inspect  
the entire system for leaks.  
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant  
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear  
steam coming from under the hood, don’t open  
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.  
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap  
when the radiator is hot.  
Coolant Checks  
Check coolant protection every 12 months (before the  
onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the cool-  
ant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be  
drained, flushed and refilled with fresh coolant.  
Cooling System - Drain, Flush and Refill  
At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules,  
the system should be drained, flushed and refilled.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 223  
If the solution is dirty and contains a considerable  
amount of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable  
cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to  
remove all deposits and chemicals.  
CAUTION!  
Failure to use the proper antifreeze could cause  
radiator plugging and engine overheating. Do not  
mix antifreeze brands or types. Do not use plain  
water alone or alcohol base antifreeze products. Do  
not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust prod-  
ucts, as they may not be compatible with the radiator  
coolant and may plug the radiator.  
Engine Coolant Disposal  
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated  
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your  
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your  
community. Do not store ethylene glycol based engine  
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in  
puddles on the ground. Prevent ingestion by animals or  
children. If ingested by a child, contact a physician  
immediately.  
Adding Coolant  
When adding coolant, a minimum solution of 50% eth-  
ylene glycol antifreeze coolant and water should be used.  
Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if tempera-  
tures below -34°F (-37°C) are anticipated.  
7
Selection Of Coolant  
Use only coolant approved to MB 325.0, such as Valvoline  
GO5, or an equivalent extended life coolant. Refer to the  
recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for  
correct coolant type.  
Use only high purity water, such as distilled or deionized  
water when mixing the water/ antifreeze solution. The  
use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of  
corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.  
NOTE: Mixing coolant types other than Moparprod-  
ucts will decrease the life of the engine coolant and will  
require more frequent coolant changes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
224 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Please note that it is the owners responsibility to main-  
tain the proper level of protection against freezing,  
according to the temperatures occurring in the area  
where the vehicle is operated.  
WARNING!  
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-  
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine  
damage may result.  
Cooling System Pressure Cap  
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of  
coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the  
radiator from the coolant reserve tank.  
Points to Remember  
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/  
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming  
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-  
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high  
humidity accumulation on the radiator and being vapor-  
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot water to  
enter the radiator.  
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any  
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.  
WARNING!  
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN WHEN HOT”  
near the cooling system reservoir cap are a safety  
precaution. Never add coolant when the engine is  
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool  
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build  
up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or  
injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the  
system is hot or under pressure.  
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no  
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be  
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.  
Do not overfill the coolant bottle.  
Check coolant freeze point in the system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 225  
If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the  
level in the recovery bottle does not drop when the  
engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure  
tested for leaks.  
Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses  
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence  
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,  
brittle rubber, cracking, checking, tears, cuts, abrasions,  
and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rub-  
ber.  
Maintain a coolant concentration of a minimum of 50%  
ethylene glycol Extended Life Coolant and high qual-  
ity water with recommended antifreeze for proper  
corrosion protection of your engine cooling system  
that contains aluminum components.  
Pay particular attention to the hoses nearest to high heat  
sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose rout-  
ing to be sure hoses do not touch any heat source or  
moving component that may cause heat damage or  
mechanical wear.  
Make sure that the radiator and coolant bottle hoses  
are not kinked or obstructed.  
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or  
collapsed. Inspect all hose connections such as clamps  
and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks  
are present. Components should be replaced immedi-  
ately if there is any evidence of degradation that could  
cause failure.  
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle has  
air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean,  
also.  
7
Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter  
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install  
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may  
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor fuel  
economy, and increased emissions.  
Brakes  
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake  
system components should be inspected periodically.  
Suggested service intervals can be found in the Mainte-  
nance section.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
226 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
NOTE: Often, fluids such as oil, power steering fluid,  
and brake fluid are used during assembly plant opera-  
tions to ease the assembly of hoses to couplings. There-  
fore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not neces-  
sarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of hot  
fluid when systems are under pressure (during vehicle  
operation) should be noted before a hose is replaced  
based on leakage.  
WARNING!  
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and  
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting  
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally  
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and  
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full  
braking capacity in an emergency.  
NOTE: Inspection of brake hoses should be done  
whenever the brake system is serviced and at every  
engine oil change.  
Brake and Power Steering System Hoses  
When servicing the vehicle for scheduled maintenance,  
inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of  
heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber,  
cracking, checking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive  
swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber. Particular  
attention should be made to examining those hose sur-  
faces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust  
manifold.  
WARNING!  
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.  
You could have an accident. If you see any signs of  
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake  
hoses replaced immediately.  
Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they  
are secure and no leaks are present.  
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or  
collapsed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 227  
Brake Master Cylinder  
Use brake fluid approved to MB 331.0, or a DOT 4 brake  
fluid with: minimum dry boiling point (ERBP) 500°F,  
minimum wet boiling point (WERBP) 356°F, maximum  
viscosity 1500 mm 2/ s, conforming to FMVSS 116 and  
ISO 4925.  
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked  
when performing under hood services, or immediately if  
the brake system warning light is on.  
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before  
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the  
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake  
fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the  
brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked  
when pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be  
caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.  
WARNING!  
Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial  
boiling point or unidentified as to specification, may  
result in sudden brake failure during hard pro-  
longed braking. You could have an accident.  
7
WARNING!  
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed  
container to avoid contamination from foreign mat-  
ter. Use of contaminated fluid may result in reduced  
brake performance or a sudden brake failure. You  
could have an accident.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
228 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
CAUTION!  
CAUTION!  
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate  
the brake fluid as seal damage will result!  
Using a transmission fluid other than the fluid  
recommended by DaimlerChrysler Corporation may  
cause deterioration in transmission shift quality  
and/or torque converter shudder. Using a transmis-  
sion fluid other than that recommended by the  
DaimlerChrysler Corporation will result in more  
frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to the Rec-  
ommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts  
section for correct fluid type.  
Automatic Transmission  
The fluid in the automatic transmission should be  
changed at 80,000 miles (129,000 km), along with the  
transmission fluid filter. After that, the transmission fluid  
is filled for life.  
Selection of Lubricant  
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the  
transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor-  
mance. Use only ATF approved to MB 236.10, MB 236.12.  
Synthetic Dexron IIIAutomatic Transmission Fluid may  
be substituted. Refer to the Recommended Fluids, Lubri-  
cants and Genuine Parts section for the correct fluid type.  
It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained  
at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid.  
Fluid Level Check  
Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks and  
changes are not required. For this reason the dipstick is  
omitted.  
If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction, have  
your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level.  
Fluid and Filter Changes  
Automatic transmission fluid and filter should be  
changed at 80,000 miles (129,000 km). The fluid is then  
filled for life.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 229  
NOTE: Refer to Section 8 of this manual for Mainte-  
nance Schedules.  
CAUTION!  
Do not overfill. Dirt and water in the transmission  
can cause serious damage. To prevent dirt and water  
from entering the transmission after checking or  
replenishing fluid, make certain that the dipstick cap  
is seated properly.  
Manual Transmission  
Selection of Lubricant  
No fluid service is required. Use only fluid approved to  
MB 236.2. SAE 5W-20 engine oil, meeting API SL or GF-3,  
may be substituted. Refer to the Recommended Fluids,  
Lubricants and Genuine Parts section for the correct fluid  
type.  
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.  
Frequency of Fluid Change  
Fluid Level Check  
Under normal operation conditions, the fluid installed at  
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of  
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless the  
lubricant has become contaminated with water. If con-  
taminated with water, the fluid should be changed im-  
mediately.  
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid  
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a  
point not more than 3/ 16 inch (4.76 mm) below the  
bottom of the hole.  
7
Special Additives  
Do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The  
only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to  
aid in detecting fluid leaks. The use of transmission  
sealers should be avoided as this may adversely affect  
seals.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
230 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion  
Stone and gravel impact.  
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion  
Vehicle body protection requirements vary according to  
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make  
roads passable in snow and ice, and those that are  
sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons,  
are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside  
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami-  
nants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,  
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi-  
tions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and  
underbody protection.  
Insects, tree sap and tar.  
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.  
Atmospheric fallout/ industrial pollutants.  
Bird droppings.  
Washing  
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-  
hicle in the shade using a mild car wash soap, and  
rinse the panels completely with clear water.  
If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-  
lated on your vehicle, wash it as soon as possible.  
The following maintenance recommendations will enable  
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion  
resistance built into your vehicle.  
Use Moparauto polish to remove road film and  
stains and to polish your vehicle. Take care never to  
scratch the paint.  
What Causes Corrosion?  
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of  
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.  
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing  
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint  
finish.  
The most common causes are:  
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 231  
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or  
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective  
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-  
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-  
sibility of the owner.  
CAUTION!  
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials  
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will  
scratch metal and painted surfaces.  
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,  
deicer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well  
packaged and sealed.  
Special Care  
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive  
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once  
a month.  
Aluminum wheels should be cleaned regularly with  
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove  
heavy soil, select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner.  
Do not use scouring pads or metal polishes. Avoid  
automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh  
brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective fin-  
ish.  
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges  
of the doors, rocker panels and rear liftgate / decklid  
be kept clear and open.  
7
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,  
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is  
considered the responsibility of the owner.  
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care  
All wheels and wheel trim, especially Aluminum, should  
be cleaned regularly, using mild soap and water to  
maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash  
them with the same soap solution as the body of your  
vehicle. Rinse the wheels thoroughly.  
Use Mopartouch-up paint on scratches or chips as  
soon as possible. Your dealer has touch-up paint to  
match the color of your vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
232 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels, care must be  
taken in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemi-  
cals and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels.  
Only MoparWheel Cleaners are recommended. Any of  
the “DO NOT USE” items listed below can damage  
wheels and wheel trim.  
CAUTION!  
Many wheel cleaners contain acids that may harm  
the wheel surface.  
Interior Care  
DO NOT USE:  
Use MoparFabric Cleaner to clean fabric upholstery  
and carpeting.  
Any abrasive cleaner  
Use MoparVinyl Cleaner to clean vinyl upholstery.  
MoparVinyl Cleaner is specifically recommended for  
vinyl trim.  
Any abrasive cleaning pad (such as steel wool) or  
abrasive brush  
Any cleaner that contains an acid which can react with  
and discolor the chrome surface.  
Leather Seat Care and Cleaning  
Leather is best preserved by regular cleaning with a  
damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an  
abrasive and damage the leather surface and should be  
removed immediately with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils  
can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MoparTotal  
Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your  
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use  
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or  
Oven cleaner  
A car wash that uses carbide-tipped wheel cleaning  
brushes or acidic solutions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 233  
ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.  
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to  
maintain the original condition.  
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and  
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To  
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-  
lowed by rinsing.  
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel  
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.  
CAUTION!  
The use of vinyl, leather or plastic protectants may  
cause excessive gloss and/or discoloration of interior  
trim parts.  
Glass Surfaces  
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis  
with any commercial household-type glass cleaner.  
Never use an abrasive-type cleaner. Use caution when  
cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric  
defrosters. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instru-  
ments which may scratch the elements.  
WARNING!  
7
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.  
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in  
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.  
Instrument Panel Cover  
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which  
minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not use  
protectants or other products which may cause undesir-  
able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the  
low glare surface.  
Cleaning Headlights  
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and  
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.  
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore  
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
234 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses  
The lenses in front of the instruments in the vehicle are  
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care  
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.  
CONVERTIBLE TOP CARE  
CAUTION!  
Due not use sharp-edged instruments to remove  
snow or ice from the soft top.  
Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be  
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive  
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp  
rag.  
NOTE: Place a suitable cover over the top if you are  
going to park the vehicle outside for a extended period of  
time.  
Dry with a soft tissue.  
Seat Belt Maintenance  
Immediate removal of any contaminant is recommended.  
Regular washing of the top will enhance its life and  
appearance, and make successive cleanings easier. Do not  
subject the top to excessive heat. Frequently vacuum the  
top and cargo compartment divider.  
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical  
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.  
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or  
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the  
vehicle to wash them.  
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the  
buckles do not work properly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 235  
Washing  
General Cleaning  
CAUTION!  
CAUTION!  
Remove bird droppings immediately. The organic  
acid can damage the material and cause the top to  
leak.  
Do not use any of the following to clean the top:  
Gasoline  
Paint Thinner  
Never use a power washer to clean the top, as you  
may damage the top material.  
Tar and Stain Removers  
Glass Cleaner  
If an automatic car wash is used, never use hot-  
wax.  
Similar Organic Solvents  
Abrasive Type Cleaners or Bleaches  
7
Hand washing is highly recommended. Automatic car  
washing equipment can damage the top material. If you  
must use an automatic car wash, soft cloth systems are  
preferred.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
236 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
The following methods are sufficient if the top is only  
lightly soiled:  
Allow the top to dry before lowering. Vacuuming the top  
with a wet/ dry shop vacuum will decrease the tops  
drying time, ensure removal of all dirt, and delete streaks  
in the material. Multiple cleanings may be necessary to  
remove stubborn stains. If stains persist, contact your  
local dealership for further suggestions.  
Dry Cleaning  
Brush the dry top with a soft-bristled brush from front to  
rear of the vehicle.  
Wet Cleaning  
Weather Strip Care  
Wash with clear water or with a mild detergent and an  
ample supply of luke warm water by wiping with a  
soft-bristled brush or sponge from front to rear. Then  
rinse thoroughly with clear water.  
Lubricate all top and door glass weather strips periodi-  
cally with Mopar Weather Strip Lubricant (part number  
4773427), to keep them soft and pliable.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 237  
FUSES  
Underhood Accessory Fuse Block Fuses  
The underhood accessory fuse block fuses are located  
under the hood on the drivers side, between the brake  
master cylinder and the left front fender.  
To remove the lid, squeeze the tabs together located at the  
front of the fusebox. Then lift the lid up by the tabs. The  
lid will then slide off the top of the fuse box. To replace  
the lid, place the two hinge-like tabs at the rear of the lid  
under the tabs on the fusebox. Push down on the front of  
the lid until the tabs at the front click.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
238 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
CAUTION!  
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use  
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The  
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may  
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a  
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it shows a  
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 239  
Underhood Accessory Fuse Block Fuses  
Cavity Fuse  
Circuits  
Cavity Fuse  
Circuits  
8
15 Amp  
Radio  
Blue  
1
2
3
5 Amp  
Beige  
Garage Door Opening Signal,  
TPM and Seat Heater  
9
10 Amp  
Red  
Roof Light, Horn, Anti-Theft  
Alarm, Cargo Lamp and Tire  
Pressure Control  
5 Amp  
Beige  
Occupant Restraint Controller  
Passenger Airbag Off  
10  
11  
12  
5 Amp  
Beige  
Speed Control  
5 Amp  
Beige  
Indicator, Safety Restraint System  
and Indicator, Passenger Airbag  
Off  
15 Amp  
Blue  
Ignition Coil 6 Cyl.  
Heated Washer Nozzles  
4
5
5
6
6
7
7.5 Amp Heated Mirror  
Brown  
10 Amp  
Red  
15 Amp  
Blue  
Radio (Coupe)  
13  
14  
Spare  
7
20 Amp  
Yellow  
Roof Control Module (Roadster)  
10 Amp  
Red  
Diagnostic Socket  
5 Amp  
Beige  
Exterior Mirror Adjustment, Left  
And Right (Coupe)  
15  
16  
17  
5 Amp  
Beige  
Residual Engine Heat Utilization  
Spoiler Motor  
40 Amp  
Orange  
Roof Hydraulic Unit (Roadster)  
10 Amp  
Red  
5 Amp  
Beige  
Electronic Transmission Control  
(Park/ Reversing Lock) and BCM  
40 Amp  
Orange  
Electronic Stability Program  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
240 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Cavity Fuse  
Circuits  
Cavity Fuse  
Circuits  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
40 Amp  
Orange  
Electronic Stability Program  
31  
32  
33  
15 Amp  
Blue  
Cigar Lighter, Glove Compart-  
ment Light  
40 Amp  
Orange  
Power Window, Front  
Wiper Motor  
15 Amp  
Blue  
Wiper, Washer Pump, Headlight  
Flasher  
30 Amp  
Green  
5 Amp  
Beige  
Residual Engine Heat Utilization  
30 Amp  
Green  
Seat Adjustment Right Side  
Seat Adjustment Left Side  
Sound Booster (Amplifier)  
Seat Heater  
34  
34  
Spare (Coupe)  
30 Amp  
Green  
Climate Control (Roadster)  
30 Amp  
Green  
35  
15 Amp  
Blue  
Radio Frequency Remote Control,  
Hazard Warning Flasher, Instru-  
ment Cluster, Residual Engine  
Heat Utilization  
15 Amp  
Blue  
30 Amp  
Green  
36  
36  
37  
30 Amp  
Green  
Climate Control (Coupe)  
20 Amp  
Yellow  
Pneumatic Control Unit, Rear  
Window Defroster  
5 Amp  
Beige  
Exterior Mirror Adjustment  
(Roadster)  
20 Amp  
Yellow  
Central Locking  
5 Amp  
Beige  
Circulating Air, Instrument Clus-  
ter, Radio Frequency Remote  
Control, Residual Engine Heat  
Utilization  
30  
30  
Spare (Coupe)  
15 Amp  
Blue  
Radio (Roadster)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 241  
Relay Control Module Fuses  
Relay Control Module Fuses  
7
The relay control module fuses are located in the Control  
Module Box next to the battery in the engine compart-  
ment. Slide the control module box cover retaining clips  
forward and lift the cover from the control module box to  
gain access to the relay control module fuses.  
Cavity Fuse  
Circuits  
1
2
3
4
5
6
15 Amp Blue  
Traction System  
Engine Control 2  
Engine Control 1  
15 Amp Blue  
15 Amp Blue  
40 Amp Orange Air Pump  
15 Amp Blue  
15 Amp Blue  
Fuel Pump  
Horn  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
242 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Interior Fuses  
Interior Fuses  
The fuse access door is located on the end of the  
instrument panel on the drivers side behind the trim  
panel cover. Use a coin or flat blade screwdriver to open  
and close this access door.  
Cavity Fuse  
1
Circuits  
Not Assigned  
2
3
4
5
15 Amp  
Blue  
7.5 Amp Right High Beam, High Beam  
Brake Lamp/ Speed Control  
Brown  
Indicator Light  
15 Amp  
Blue  
Reverse/ Turn signal Light  
7.5 Amp Left High Beam  
Brown  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 243  
REPLACEMENT BULBS  
Cavity Fuse  
Circuits  
6
15 Amp  
Blue  
7.5 Amp Right Parking/ Tail Light Side  
Right Low Beam  
Interior Light Bulbs  
For lighted switches and interior lights, see your autho-  
rized dealer for servicing requirements.  
7
Brown  
Marker  
Exterior Light Bulbs  
8
15 Amp  
Blue  
Left Low Beam  
Bulb  
Bulb No.  
9
15 Amp  
Blue  
Fog Light  
Headlight - High and Low Beam . . . . . . 12V55W H7U  
Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y21W  
Front Parking/ Standing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W  
Front Side Marker Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W  
Rear Marker Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W  
Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL) . . . . . LED  
Front Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HB455W  
Rear Turn Signal Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y21W  
Rear Tail and Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21/5W  
Backup Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21W  
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168  
10  
11  
7.5 Amp Left Parking/ Tail Light Side  
Brown Marker  
7.5 Amp License Plate/ Instrument Cluster  
Brown  
Lighting/ Symbol Lighting  
Not Used - Spare Fuse  
Not Used - Spare Fuse  
Not Used - Spare Fuse  
7
12  
13  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
244 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
EXTERIOR LIGHT BULB SERVICE  
Headlights  
WARNING!  
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A bulb can  
explode if you:  
Touch or move it when hot  
Drop the bulb  
Scratch the bulb  
Wear eye and hand protection.  
CAUTION!  
NOTE: To prevent a possible electrical short circuit,  
switch off light prior to replacing a bulb.  
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil  
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the  
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the  
bulb with rubbing alcohol.  
1. Push the tab down at the top end of the cover and  
remove.  
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.  
3. Release the spring clamps holding the bulb in place,  
and pull out the bulb. Replace the bulb and reverse the  
removal procedure exactly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 245  
Front Turn Signal and Parking/Standing Lights  
Twist the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull out.  
Push the bulb into the socket, turn counterclockwise  
and remove.  
Replace the bulb, push in and twist clockwise. Rein-  
stall the socket, and turn clockwise.  
Front and Rear Sidemarker Lights  
1. Push the front sidemarker assembly in and slide it  
forward. Push the rear sidemarker assembly in and slide  
rearward. The assembly will release from the fascia.  
Tail, Stop, Back Up and Turn Signal Lights  
2. Twist the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull out.  
Push the bulb into the socket, turn counterclockwise and  
remove.  
7
1. Open the rear liftgate / decklid and remove the access  
door in the trim panel.  
3. Replace the light, push in and twist clockwise.  
2. Twist the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull out.  
4. Realign the two tabs and push the light in until it  
engages into the lock.  
3. Replace the light and return to open socket, turn  
clockwise until it stops.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
246 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
4. Replace the access door in the trim panel.  
NOTE: Always test the operation of all lights after  
service operations have been performed to validate an  
effective repair.  
License Plate Light  
1. Remove the two lens assembly mounting screws.  
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.  
Headlight Aiming  
The headlights on your new vehicle were aimed at the  
factory. The factory setting was made at a no load setting.  
A great increase in weight will change the aiming and it  
may be necessary to readjust the headlights if carrying an  
excessive amount of weight in the rear cargo area. To  
readjust the headlights first mark the position of the  
headlights on a wall prior to loading the vehicle. Load  
3. Replace the bulb and reattach the lens assembly.  
4. Align and resecure the two lens assembly mounting  
screws.  
NOTE: Be sure not to over-torque the mounting screws  
or permanent damage to the lens may occur.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 247  
the vehicle and then readjust the headlights to the  
original position. If any further adjustments are neces-  
sary contact your manufacturers dealer. A detailed ser-  
vice procedure is contained in the manufacturers Service  
Manual. Information on purchasing a Service Manual can  
be found at the back of this Owners Manual.  
Store the vehicle in a dry, well-ventilated location.  
If the vehicle will be subjected to freezing tempera-  
tures, remove the battery and store it in a dry, well-  
ventilated place. If the vehicle is not going to be driven  
in the next three weeks, follow the battery recharge  
procedure in the Service Manual, then disconnect the  
battery at the negative terminal.  
VEHICLE STORAGE  
We recommend that you follow these guidelines before  
storing your Crossfire for extended periods.  
CAUTION!  
Fill the gas tank. This will prevent water condensation  
inside the tank. If you plan on storing your vehicle  
more than two months, add an anti-oxidant fuel  
stabilizer to the gas tank.  
Use care when disconnecting the remote positive  
cable. It is connected to the battery and can short out  
to any metal on the vehicle. Always tape or wrap the  
exposed cable end to prevent electrical shorts.  
7
Change the oil to remove any corrosive combustion-  
related acids in the crankcase.  
Disconnecting the battery causes the engine control sys-  
tem to lose memory of some “learned” functions. The  
engine may run rough when first started after a battery  
disconnect until the control module “relearns” these  
functions.  
Wash and wax the vehicle to protect the finish.  
Cover the vehicle whenever possible to prevent acci-  
dental damage to the finish.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
248 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Check the battery every four to six weeks to ensure that  
the voltage is above 12.40. Voltage will drop more rapidly  
in hot temperatures. If battery voltage drops below 12.40,  
follow the battery recharge procedure in the Service  
Manual.  
NOTE: To help prevent the battery from discharging  
during shorter periods of inactivity, perform the follow-  
ing:  
1. Make sure that the rear liftgate/ decklid, hood, and  
doors are completely closed.  
Check that the radiator coolant level of protection is to  
at least -20°F (-29°C).  
2. Make sure that the remote transmitter is operating and  
that the battery is good.  
Block the wheels. Do not apply the parking brake.  
3. Make sure that the hood, rear liftgate and door  
switches are in adjustment.  
Make sure that all tires are inflated to the optimum  
pressure.  
4. Use the remote transmitter to set the alarm.  
Cut blocks of plywood about the same size of the tires.  
Cover each block with indoor/ outdoor carpeting and  
place them between the tires and concrete. This will  
prevent tire flat spotting.  
For long term storage, remove the tires and put the  
vehicle up on blocks. Stack the tires on plywood and  
cover with a tarp to prevent flat spotting.  
Move the wiper blades away from the windshield.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 249  
SPECIFICATIONS  
Performance Specifications (approximate)  
Maximum Speed  
Acceleration 0–60 mph  
1/ 4 mile time  
150 mph (242 km/ h)  
6.5 seconds  
Engine Specifications  
Engine Size  
195.2 CID (3.2 Liters)  
14.9 seconds at 96 mph  
(154 km/ h)  
Mode of Operation  
4–stroke engine, gasoline  
injection  
Gear Ratios - 6-Speed Manual Transmission  
No. of Cylinders  
6
Horsepower (SAE J 1349) 215 hp (160 kW) @ 5700  
rpm  
First  
4.459  
2.614  
1.723  
1.245  
1.000  
0.838  
4.062  
Second  
Third  
Fourth  
Fifth  
Bore  
3.54 in. (89.90 mm)  
3.30 in. (84.00 mm)  
Stroke  
Torque (SAE J 1349)  
229 ft. lbs. (310 N·m) @  
3000 rpm  
7
Sixth  
Firing Order  
1–4–3–6–2–5  
10:1  
Reverse  
Compression Ratio  
Spark Plugs  
Gear Ratios - 5-Speed Automatic Transmission  
Bosch F 8 DPER/ NGK  
PFR 5–11  
First  
3.95  
Spark Plug Gap  
0.039 in. (1.0 mm)  
15-22 ft. lbs. (20-30 N·m)  
6000 rpm  
Second  
Third  
2.423  
Tightening Torque  
Maximum Engine Speed  
Accessory Drive Belt  
1.486  
Fourth  
Fifth  
1.00  
94.1 in. (2390 mm)  
0.833  
Reverse  
3.147/ 1.93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
250 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Body Specifications  
Rear Ground Clearance  
Turning Radius  
Weight  
5.8 in. (147 mm)  
32.2 ft. (9.8 m)  
Overall Length  
159.8 in. (4058 mm)  
Maximum Width  
69.5 in. (1766 mm)  
76.9 in. (1954 mm)  
Maximum Width With  
Mirrors  
Coupe:  
3010 lbs. (1365 kg)  
3097 lbs. (1405 kg)  
415 lbs.. (188 kg)  
Roadster:  
Overall Height  
Coupe:  
Maximum Vehicle Load  
Luggage Capacity  
Coupe:  
51.5 in. (1307 mm)  
51.8 in. (1315 mm)  
58.8 in. (1493 mm)  
59.1 in. (1502 mm)  
94.5 in. (2400 mm)  
32.4 in. (822 mm)  
32.9 in. (836 mm)  
5.0 in. (127 mm)  
Roadster:  
7.7 cu. ft. (215 l)  
Front Track  
Roadster:  
6.5 cu. ft. (190 l) - Top Up  
3.6 cu. ft. (104 l) - Top  
Down  
Rear Track  
Wheelbase  
Front Overhang  
Rear Overhang  
Front Ground Clearance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 251  
FLUID CAPACITIES  
U.S.  
15.8 Gallons  
2 Gallons  
Metric  
60.0 Liters  
7.5 Liters  
Fuel (Approximate)  
Fuel Tank Reserve  
Engine Oil (with filter)  
3.2 L Engine  
3.2 L Engine  
8.5 Qts.  
8.0 Liters  
Cooling System *  
11.8 Qts.  
1.9 Qts.  
8.5 Qts.  
1.4 Qts.  
1.1 Qts.  
.5 Qts.  
11.2 Liters  
1.8 Liters  
8.0 Liters  
1.3 Liters  
1.0 Liters  
.5 Liters  
Manual Transmission  
Automatic Transmission  
Rear Axle  
Power Steering Reservoir  
Brake Reservoir  
7
Windshield Washer Reservoir (MAX fill when empty)  
7.4 Qts.  
7.0 Liters  
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
252 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS  
Engine  
Component  
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts  
Engine Coolant  
Use coolant approved to MB 325.0, such as Valvoline GO5, or an equivalent  
extended life coolant.  
Engine Oil  
Only use synthetic engine oils, approved to MB 229.3 or MB 229.5, such as  
Mobil 1 SAE 0W-40. The FSS may not alert for an oil change at the proper  
interval if an unapproved engine oil is used; engine damage and reduced  
engine life may result.  
Engine Oil Filter  
Spark Plugs  
Mopar5102905AA or equivalent  
Bosch F 8 DPER/ NGK PFR 5-11  
0.039 in (1.0 mm)  
Spark Plug Gap  
Fuel Selection  
Premium Unleaded 91 Octane  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 253  
Chassis  
Component  
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts  
Automatic Transmission  
Only use ATF approved to MB 236.10, MB 236.12. Synthetic Dexron III௡  
Transmission Fluid may be substituted.  
Brake Master Cylinder  
Clutch Fluid  
Use brake fluid approved to MB 331.0, or a DOT 4 brake fluid with: mini-  
mum dry boiling point (ERBP) 500°F (260°C), minimum wet boiling point  
(WERBP) 356°F (180°C), maximum viscosity 1500 mm2/ s, conforming to  
FMVSS 116 and ISO 4925.  
Use brake fluid approved to MB 331.0, or a DOT 4 brake fluid with: mini-  
mum dry boiling point (ERBP) 500°F (260°C), minimum wet boiling point  
(WERBP) 356°F (180°C), maximum viscosity 1500 mm2/ s, conforming to  
FMVSS 116 and ISO 4925.  
Manual Transmission Fluid  
Power Steering Reservoir  
No fluid service required. Only use fluid approved to MB 236.2. SAE  
5W-20 engine oil, meeting API SL or GF-3, may be substituted.  
7
No fluid service required. Filled at the factory with Pentosin CHF 11S.  
Steering noise and reduced component life may result if an unapproved  
fluid is used.  
Rear Axle Fluid  
Tire Pressure  
Only use synthetic SAE 75W-85 axle lubricant that meets MB 231.1. Re-  
duced axle durability may result if an unapproved product is used.  
Refer to label on drivers door frame.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
254 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Body  
Component  
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts  
Hinges:  
Door MoparSpray White Lube  
Liftgate / Decklid MoparMulti-Purpose Lube NLGI Grade 2 EP, GC-LB  
Hood Springs and Links MoparSpray White Lube  
Latches:  
Liftgate/ Decklid MoparSpray White Lube  
Hood/ Safety Catch MoparMulti-Purpose Lube NLGI Grade 2 EP, GC-LB  
Door MoparSpray White Lube  
Seat Regulator and Track  
Window System Components  
Lock Cylinders  
MoparMulti-Purpose Lube NLGI Grade 2 EP, GC-LB  
MoparSpray White Lube  
MoparLock Cylinder Lube  
Spoiler  
MoparSpray White Lube  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M
A
I
N
T
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES  
E
N
A
N
C
E
CONTENTS  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256  
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256  
Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257  
Regular Check-Ups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261  
Additional Periodic Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 262  
Special Maintenance Requirements . . . . . . . . . 264  
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264  
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258  
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264  
E
S
8
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259  
FSS System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M
A
I
256 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES  
INTRODUCTION  
This is intended as a guide to the service requirements of  
your vehicle.  
WARRANTY  
N
T
The DaimlerChrysler Corporation Dealer network is at  
your disposal for maintenance work. Each of these work-  
shops has the equipment and tools, the specially trained,  
skilled and experienced personnel and receives regular  
technical instruction from DaimlerChrysler Corporation  
to ensure that your vehicle is inspected and maintained  
thoroughly and in accordance with the latest procedures.  
E
N
A
N
C
E
It contains all necessary instructions concerning service  
intervals and operations which have to be carried out.  
Scope and frequency of maintenance work primarily  
depend on the vehicles operating conditions. In the  
interest of maintaining the vehicles operating safety, the  
specified work should be performed regularly and in  
good time.  
S
C
H
E
Please follow the instructions given in this Owners  
Manual and ensure that they are observed, even if you  
hand the vehicle over to a third party for use or care. By  
not observing these instructions you may void your  
warranty rights.  
D
U
L
Our vehicles are subject to ongoing development. Tech-  
nical progress may also affect the scope of service work  
performed.  
E
S
If the specified oil and maintenance services are not  
carried out regularly or at the time intervals specified, a  
decision as to the validity of a warranty claim can only be  
made after DaimlerChrysler Corporation has investi-  
gated your claim.  
8
“Daily vehicle checks” before starting a journey are the  
responsibility of the driver.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 257  
The use of Special lubricant additives is not recom-  
mended. The use of such additives may affect your  
warranty rights. With regard to legal stipulations con-  
cerning emissions control, please note that engines have  
to be serviced and adjusted in accordance with special  
instructions and using special measuring equipment.  
Modifications to or interference with the emissions con-  
trol systems are not permissible.  
Inspection and service also should be done any time a  
malfunction is suspected.  
N
T
E
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the  
emission control devices and systems on your vehicle  
may be performed by any automotive repair establish-  
ment or individual using any automotive part which has  
been certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of  
California, California Air Resources Board regulations.  
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
All DaimlerChrysler Corporation dealers are familiar  
with the relevant and applicable regulations.  
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES  
D
U
L
There are two maintenance schedules that show the  
required service for your vehicle.  
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE  
The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold  
type must be done at the times or mileages specified to  
assure the continued proper functioning of the emission  
control system. These, and all other maintenance services  
included in this manual, should be done to provide best  
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-  
tenance may be needed for your Crossfire in severe  
operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short  
trip driving.  
E
S
Schedule “A” typically rotates with Schedule “B.” Follow  
Schedule “A” after the first service interval, Schedule “B”  
after the second service interval, and so on. In some cases  
where the service interval has been extended due to very  
light duty driving, a Schedule “B” service may be indi-  
cated following a previous Schedule “B” service. There  
are additional service tasks required under Schedule “B.”  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M
A
I
258 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES  
Your Flexible Service System (FSS) — see Understanding  
Your Instrument Panel section — should give you an  
exact indication of when your vehicle should be sched-  
uled for service and which schedule to follow.  
Windshield wipers and washer system  
N
T
Inspection  
E
N
A
N
C
E
Check front and rear brake pads for lining thickness  
Check tires for damage and general condition  
Additional Periodic Maintenance items should also be  
performed beyond the items listed in the following charts  
to assure the optimum performance of your Crossfire.  
Check tire inflation pressures and correct if necessary  
S
C
H
E
Fluid Levels  
SCOPE OF WORK FOR “A” SCHEDULE  
MAINTENANCE SERVICE  
Oil Change  
Check fluid levels for the following systems and correct if  
necessary. Should there be a loss of fluid that cannot be  
explained by regular use, trace and eliminate the cause.  
D
U
L
Change oil and replace filter  
E
Engine cooling system (check corrosion inhibitor/  
antifreeze)  
Maintenance  
S
8
Lubricate hood hinges, latch, and secondary latch  
Reset FSS Display  
Hydraulic brake system  
Power steering system  
Windshield washer system  
Function Check  
Horn, hazard warning flashers, turn signals, and indi-  
cator lamps  
Headlamps and exterior lighting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 259  
SCOPE OF WORK FOR “B” SCHEDULE  
MAINTENANCE SERVICE  
Oil Change  
Inspection  
N
T
Check front and rear brake pads for lining thickness  
Check condition of front and rear brake discs  
Check tires for damage and general condition  
Check tire inflation pressures and correct if necessary  
E
N
A
N
C
E
Change oil and replace filter  
Maintenance  
Rotate tires  
S
C
H
E
Check major underbody components for leakage or  
damage (if there are signs of leakage, determine cause  
and repair)  
Replace dust filter (if equipped)  
Lubricate hood hinges, latch, and secondary latch  
Reset FSS Display  
D
U
L
Check condition of front axle ball joints and rubber  
boots  
E
Function Check  
S
Check condition of steering components and rubber  
boots  
Horn, hazard warning flashers, turn signals, and indi-  
cator lamps  
8
Check underhood components for leakage or damage  
(if there are signs of leakage determine cause and  
repair)  
Headlamps and exterior lighting  
Windshield wipers and washer system  
Check seat belts for damage and proper function  
Check condition of accessory drive belt  
Test hydraulic brakes and check parking brake func-  
tion  
Check headlamp aiming, adjust if necessary  
Check windshield wiper blades, replace if necessary  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M
A
I
260 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES  
Fluid Levels  
km). If ANY of the following apply to your driving, the  
oil change interval can be reduced significantly:  
N
T
Check fluid levels for the following systems and correct if  
necessary. Should there be a loss of fluid that cannot be  
explained by regular use, trace and eliminate the cause.  
E
Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).  
Stop and go driving.  
N
A
N
C
E
Engine cooling system (check corrosion inhibitor/  
antifreeze)  
Extensive engine idling.  
Driving in dusty conditions.  
S
C
H
E
Hydraulic brake system  
Power steering system  
Windshield washer system  
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).  
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high  
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).  
D
U
L
FSS SYSTEM  
E
There are two symbols which will appear in the main  
odometer display field prior to the next suggested service.  
S
The Flexible Service System (FSS) permits a flexible service  
schedule that is directly related to the operating conditions  
of the vehicle. See the Understanding Your Instrument  
Panel section for details on how to use the FSS.  
8
This symbol represents Service A.  
The oil change interval for your Crossfire is initially set at  
7,000 miles (Canada: 11,000 km). Very light duty driving  
cycles (most trips more than 10 miles [16 km] at moderate  
speeds in moderate temperature conditions) can extend  
the service interval beyond 7,000 miles (Canada: 11,000  
This second symbol represents Service B. Ser-  
vice B rotates with Service A and includes  
additional service tasks.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 261  
The next service is normally calculated and  
displayed next to the Service A or Service B  
symbol as distance remaining before the next  
service is required.  
The interval between services is determined by the type  
of vehicle operation. Driving at extreme speeds, and cold  
starts combined with short distance driving in which the  
engine does not reach normal operating temperature,  
reduce the interval between services.  
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
Depending on operating conditions through-  
out the year, a clock symbol may appear next to  
the service symbol. When this occurs, the next  
service is calculated and displayed in days  
remaining before the next service is required.  
Regardless of the service interval determined by your  
FSS, the scheduled services as posted in this manual must  
be followed to properly care for your vehicle.  
S
C
H
E
REGULAR CHECK-UPS  
You should have the maintenance performed within the  
stated time period or distance.  
D
U
L
To maintain the safe operation of your vehicle, it is  
recommended that you perform the following tasks on a  
regular basis (i.e., weekly or whenever the vehicle is  
refueled).  
E
Following a completed A or B service your authorized  
dealer sets the counter to 7,000 miles (Canada: 11,000  
km).  
S
8
CAUTION!  
NOTE: When disconnecting vehicle battery for one or  
more days at a time, such days will not be counted. Any  
such days not counted by FSS can be added by your  
authorized dealer.  
Failure to perform the required maintenance items  
may result in damage to the vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M
A
I
262 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES  
At Each Stop for Fuel  
Once a Month  
N
T
Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully  
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while  
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu-  
racy of the oil level reading. See the procedure de-  
scribed in Checking Your Engine Oil in the Under-  
standing Your Instrument Panel section or under  
Engine Oil in the Maintaining Your Vehicle section.  
Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or  
MIN mark.  
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals  
as required.  
E
N
A
N
C
E
Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake  
master cylinder and power steering and add as  
needed.  
S
C
H
E
Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct  
operation.  
Additional Periodic Maintenance  
D
U
L
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if  
required.  
The following maintenance items should be performed  
during the scheduled maintenance nearest the time  
elapsed and/ or distance shown. Follow the interval that  
occurs first.  
E
S
Inspect wiper blade condition.  
8
Check operation of lighting systems.  
Every 2 years:  
Inspect tires for unusual wear, damage, and pressure  
(at least every 14 days).  
Inspect body for paint damage.  
Check chassis and supporting body parts for damage  
and corrosion.  
Mechanical assemblies (e.g., engine, transmission, etc.)  
- check for leaks.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 263  
At approximately every 50,000 miles (80,000 km) or 4  
years:  
At approximately every 100,000 miles (161,000 km) or 5  
years:  
N
T
E
Check condition of driveshaft flex discs.  
Replace spark plugs.  
N
A
N
C
E
Retighten locking bolts for steering (observe torque).  
Every 100,000 miles (161,000 km) or 5 years:  
At approximately every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 4  
years:  
Replace engine coolant using coolant approved to MB  
325.0, such as Valvoline GO5, or an equivalent ex-  
tended life coolant.  
S
C
H
E
Replace fuel filter.  
Replace air cleaner filter element.  
WARNING!  
D
U
L
At approximately 80,000 miles (129,000 km):  
You can be badly injured working on or around a  
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which  
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If  
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a  
maintenance service, take your vehicle to a compe-  
tent technician.  
E
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.  
Use the recommended automatic transmission fluid.  
After this change it is filled for life. The manual  
transmission comes filled for life from the factory.  
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
264 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES  
SPECIAL MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS  
ENGINE OIL CHANGE AND FILTER  
REPLACEMENT  
N
T
Coolant  
E
The recommended oil and filter change interval is based  
on FSS or 1 year. Please refer to the heading FSS System  
in this section for a full description of the use and  
interpretation of symbols in the FSS system. Only use  
synthetic engine oils, approved to MB 229.3 or MB 229.5,  
such as Mobil 1 SAE 0W-40. The FSS may not alert for an  
oil change at the proper interval if an unapproved engine  
oil is used; engine damage and reduced engine life may  
result. Information is available from your authorized  
dealer. The oil filter should always be changed when the  
oil is changed.  
Have the corrosion inhibitor/ antifreeze concentration in  
the coolant checked before the onset of winter (once a  
year in countries with high prevailing temperatures).  
Have the coolant replaced every five years or 100,000  
miles (160,000 km).  
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
Dust Filter for Heating/Ventilation Replacement (If  
Equipped)  
The dust filter is replaced during routine maintenance  
service. The filter element must be replaced with “B”  
Schedule service or every 18,500 miles (30,000 km) to  
maintain effectiveness. However, if operating conditions  
are dusty, these filters should be replaced more fre-  
quently. A cover in the HVAC unit that can be reached  
from the passenger foot well provides access to the filter  
element.  
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE  
CONTENTS  
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269  
In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269  
Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270  
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271  
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271  
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . 274  
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 275  
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266  
Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 266  
Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266  
Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266  
If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266  
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269  
MoparParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
266 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE  
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR  
YOUR VEHICLE  
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable  
to make these arrangements when you call for an ap-  
pointment.  
Prepare For The Appointment  
If youre having warranty work done, be sure to have the  
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All  
work to be performed may not be covered by the  
warranty; discuss additional charges with the service  
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicles  
service history. This can often provide a valuable clue to  
the current problem.  
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE  
DaimlerChrysler and its dealers are vitally interested in  
your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our  
products and services.  
Your selling dealer is best equipped and most anxious to  
provide prompt resolution for any warranty issue or  
related matter that you may experience. Authorized  
dealers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians,  
special tools, and the latest information to assure your  
vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.  
DaimlerChrysler has empowered its dealers to make  
warranty and repair decisions that ensure you are not  
inconvenienced. There is no need for you to wait for a  
decision from the DaimlerChrysler Corporation. If a  
special circumstance occurs that requires information  
from the DaimlerChrysler Corporation, we have asked  
the dealers service management to make the contact on  
your behalf.  
Prepare A List  
Make a written list of your vehicles problems or the  
specific work you want done. If youve had an accident,  
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the  
service advisor know.  
Be Reasonable With Requests  
If you list a number of items, and you must have your  
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with  
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.  
At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 267  
This is why you should always talk to your dealers  
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with  
this process.  
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer  
Center  
P.O. Box 21–8004  
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004  
Phone: (800) 992-1997  
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the  
general manager or owner of the dealership. They  
want to know if you need assistance.  
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center  
P.O. Box 1621  
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6  
Phone: (800) 465-2001  
If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you  
may contact the DaimlerChrysler Corporations Cus-  
tomer Center.  
In Mexico contact:  
A.V. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240  
Sante Fe C.P. 05109  
Mexico, D.F.  
Any communication to the DaimlerChrysler Corpora-  
tions Customer Center should include the following  
information:  
Owners name and address  
In Mexico (915) 729-1248 or 729-1240  
Outside Mexico (525) 729-1248 or 729-1240  
Owners telephone number (home and office)  
Dealership name  
9
Vehicle identification number  
Vehicle delivery date and mileage  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
268 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE  
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech  
Impaired (TDD/TTY)  
DaimlerChrysler Corporation Service Contract Na-  
tional Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.  
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the  
DaimlerChrysler Corporation has installed special  
TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equip-  
ment at its Customer Center. Any hearing or speech  
impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a  
conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States  
can communicate with the DaimlerChrysler Corpora-  
tion by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.  
The DaimlerChrysler Corporation will not stand behind  
any service contract that is not the DaimlerChrysler  
Corporations Service Contract. It is not responsible for  
any service contract other than the DaimlerChrysler  
Corporations Service Contract. If you purchased a ser-  
vice contract that is not a DaimlerChrysler Corporation  
Service Contract, and you require service after your  
DaimlerChrysler Corporations new vehicle limited war-  
ranty expires, please refer to your contract documents,  
and contact the person listed in those documents.  
Service Contract  
You may have purchased a service contract for your  
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of  
unexpected repairs after your DaimlerChrysler Corpo-  
rations new vehicle limited warranty expires. The  
DaimlerChrysler Corporation stands behind only the  
DaimlerChrysler Corporations Service Contracts. If  
you purchased a DaimlerChrysler Corporation Service  
Contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an  
Owner Identification Card in the mail within three  
weeks of your vehicle delivery date. If you have any  
questions about your service contract, call the  
We appreciate that you have made a major investment  
when you purchased your new Crossfire. Your dealer has  
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and  
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with  
your ownership experience. Youll be pleased with their  
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related  
concerns.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 269  
WARRANTY INFORMATION  
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety  
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in Wash-  
ington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Dept. of  
Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also  
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from  
the Hotline.  
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and  
provisions of DaimlerChryslers warranties applicable to  
this vehicle.  
MOPARPARTS  
Moparfluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are  
available from your authorized dealer. They will help  
you keep your vehicle operating at its best.  
In Canada:  
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you  
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-  
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety  
defect to the Canadian government should write to  
Transport Canada, P.O. Box 8880, Ottawa Postal Station,  
Ottawa, Ontario K1G 3J2.  
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS  
In the 50 states of the United States and Washington,  
D.C.: If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which  
could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should  
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety  
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the  
DaimlerChrysler Corporation.  
9
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an  
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in  
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy  
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in  
individual problems between you, your dealer, and the  
DaimlerChrysler Corporation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
270 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE  
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS  
Owner’s Manuals.  
To order the following manuals, you may use either the  
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-  
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-  
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call  
for an order form.  
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance  
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you  
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are  
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-  
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and  
safety tips.  
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering  
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).  
Call Toll Free at 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.) or 1–800–387–1143  
Service Manuals.  
(Canada)  
These comprehensive service manuals provide the  
information that students and professional technicians  
need in diagnosing/ troubleshooting, problem solving,  
maintaining, servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler  
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge  
of the vehicle, system and/ or components is written in  
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams  
and charts.  
Or  
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:  
www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com  
www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals  
or  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 271  
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION  
Tire Markings  
NOTE: European Metric tire sizing is based on Euro-  
pean design standards. Tires designed to this standard  
have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning  
with the section width. The letter ЉPЉ is absent from this  
tire size designation. Example: 215/ 65R15 96H.  
NOTE: LT(Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on  
U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric  
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters  
LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size  
designation. Example: LT235/ 85R16.  
NOTE: Temporary Spare tires are high pressure com-  
pact spares designed for temporary emergency use only.  
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”  
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.  
Example: T145/ 80D18 103M.  
Tire Sizing Chart  
NOTE: P(Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.  
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”  
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.  
Example: P215/ 65R15 95H.  
9
NOTE: High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S.  
design standards and begins with the tire diameter  
molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
272 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE  
EXAMPLE:  
Size Designation:  
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards  
؆...blank...؆ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards  
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards  
T = Temporary Spare tire  
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)  
215 = Section Width in Millimeters (mm)  
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)  
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.  
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)  
R = Construction Code  
ЉRЉ means Radial Construction.  
ЉDЉ means Diagonal or Bias Construction.  
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 273  
Service Description:  
95 = Load Index  
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.  
H = Speed Symbol  
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load  
index under certain operating conditions.  
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved under specified  
operating conditions. i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions and posted speed limits.)  
Load Identification:  
؆...blank...؆ = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire  
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire  
Light Load = Light Load Tire  
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure  
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.  
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this  
tire.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
274 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE  
Tire Identification Number (TIN)  
EXAMPLE:  
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301  
DOT = Department of Transportation  
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in com-  
pliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation  
tire safety standards, and is approved for highway  
use.  
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire  
however the date code may only be on one side. Tires  
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including  
date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire.  
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall  
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on  
the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side  
of the tire.  
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing loca-  
tion. (2 digits)  
L9 = Code representing the tire size. (2 digits)  
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 dig-  
its)  
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire  
was manufactured. (2 digits)  
—03 means the 3rd week.  
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire  
was manufactured. (2 digits)  
—01 means the year 2001.  
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were  
only required to have 1 number to represent the year  
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031  
could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 275  
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure  
Tire and Loading Information Placard  
Tire Placard Location  
NOTE: Some vehicles have a “Tire and Loading Infor-  
mation” placard located on the drivers side “Bpillar.  
This placard tells you important information about:  
1. the number of people that can be carried in the vehicle  
2. the total weight your vehicle can carry  
9
3. the tire size designed for your vehicle  
4. the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear and  
spare tires.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
276 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE  
Loading  
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit  
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed  
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You  
will not exceed the tires load carrying capacity if you  
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size and cold tire  
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading  
Information placard and the Vehicle Loading section of  
this manual.  
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-  
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” or  
Vehicle Capacity” on your vehicles placard.  
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and  
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.  
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-  
sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.  
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,  
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear  
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on  
GAWR’s, vehicle loading and trailer towing, see the  
Vehicle Loading section of this manual.  
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of  
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”  
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.  
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo  
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5 x 15) =  
650 lb.)  
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your  
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of  
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX  
lbs.” or “Vehicle Capacity” on the Tire and Loading  
Information placard. The combined weight of occupants,  
cargo/ luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable)  
should never exceed the weight referenced here.  
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo  
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely  
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity  
calculated in step 4.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 277  
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your  
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this  
manual to determine how this reduces the available  
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.  
number and size of occupants. This table is for illustra-  
tion purposes only and may not be accurate for the  
seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.  
NOTE: For the following example the combined weight  
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392  
Kg).  
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to  
calculate total load, cargo/ luggage and towing capacities  
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
278 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 279  
WARNING!  
Overloading of your tire is dangerous. Overloading  
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and  
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the  
recommended load capacity for your vehicle-never  
overload them.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
282 INDEX  
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . 223  
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Aiming Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246  
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128,216  
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264  
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216  
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216  
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32,116  
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Airbag On/ Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37,41  
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165  
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251  
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230  
Ashtrays and Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141,228  
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228  
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228  
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228  
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229  
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145  
Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218  
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112,215  
Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213  
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218  
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,225  
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150  
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226  
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227  
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243  
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249  
Capacity, Cargo Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX 283  
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Convertible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Convertible Top Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234  
Convertible Top Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . 195  
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223,264  
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222  
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223  
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222  
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223  
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222  
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224  
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224  
Rubber and Plastic Components . . . . . . . . . . 225  
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 223  
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230  
Crankcase Emission Control System . . . . . . . . . 215  
Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266  
Cylinders, Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218  
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214  
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119,123  
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167  
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180  
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237  
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233  
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233  
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Compact Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268  
Converter, Catalytic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183  
10  
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208  
Deck Lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
284 INDEX  
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212  
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221  
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243  
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212  
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Drive Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213  
Drive Shaft Universal Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218  
On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213  
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264  
Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213  
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212  
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249,251  
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229  
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190  
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213  
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
Electronic Stability Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187  
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191  
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209  
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205  
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209,251  
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX 285  
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237  
Wiring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215  
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233  
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . 234  
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
Gas Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251  
Gasoline/ Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
Gear Ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249  
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167  
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233  
Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184  
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180  
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187  
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246  
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233  
Dimmer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
Hood Latch Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218  
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225  
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
10  
Lap/ Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243  
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
286 INDEX  
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218  
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32,116  
Anti-Lock Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245  
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
Exterior Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,243  
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246  
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,245  
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245  
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245  
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276  
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276  
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215  
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209  
Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257  
Malfunction Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 117,207  
Manual Override, Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . 195  
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270  
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139,229  
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229  
Frequency of Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229  
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229  
Marker Lights, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245  
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227  
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . 83,165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX 287  
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208,269  
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158,217  
Steering, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217  
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Program Mode Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147  
Programming Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100,101  
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209  
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211  
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209  
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212  
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212  
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212  
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212  
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212  
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . 206,207  
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Owners Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270  
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
Rear Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Rear Spoiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216  
Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163  
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269  
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Restraints, Infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169  
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230  
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
10  
Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
288 INDEX  
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159  
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257  
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234  
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232  
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266  
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268  
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270  
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139,140  
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167  
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168  
Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249  
Standing Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
Emergency (Jump Starting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187  
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218  
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158  
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247  
Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190  
Sulfur in Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . 179  
Theft Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159  
TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180  
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159,271  
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX 289  
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165  
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167  
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180,184  
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159  
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161  
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160,275  
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275  
Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,165  
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271  
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163  
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169  
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,159  
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271  
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168  
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163  
Tow-Away Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,194  
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191  
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191  
Trailering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176  
Towing Eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192  
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190  
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176  
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141,228  
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228  
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139,229  
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139,140  
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163  
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Umbrella Hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271  
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98,101  
Vacuum/ Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225  
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247  
Vehicle Theft Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
10  
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
290 INDEX  
Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220  
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230  
Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165  
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231  
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219  
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219  
Wiring, Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Beko Washer WMI 61241 User Manual
Belkin Network Router F7D7302 User Manual
Body Solid Home Gym FID 46 User Manual
Bolens Lawn Mower 030 thru 062 User Manual
Boss Audio Systems Speaker System 201 User Manual
Broadband Products Network Router xDSL Cable User Manual
Carrier Heat Pump 38YCX User Manual
Casablanca Fan Company Outdoor Ceiling Fan C16G73T User Manual
Chamberlain Garage Door Opener 1000SDC 1 3HP User Manual
Char Broil Grill Accessory 4984722 User Manual